Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPLAN SPECIFICATIONS - 20-00181 - BYU Idaho Romney Fan Wall 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT PROJECT ROMNEY BUILDING AT BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO REXBURG, IDAHO OWNER PROJECT NO: 11886 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Prepared by HEATH ENGINEERING COMPANY 377 West 800 North Salt Lake City, Utah 84103 March 5, 2020 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT ROMNEY BUILDING AT BYU - IDAHO TABLE OF CONTENTS AUTHORITY LIST OF CONSULTANTS BIDDING REQUIREMENTS INVITATION TO PROPOSE NOTICE TO BIDDERS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FORM OF PROPOSAL GENERAL CONDITIONS AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTACTOR DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL SECTION 23 0000 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0100 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS SECTION 23 0505 FIRESTOPPING SECTION 23 0513 MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 23 0516 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT STATION SECTION 23 0519 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES SECTION 23 0523 VALVES SECTION 23 0529 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 23 0548 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL SECTION 23 0553 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING SECTION 23 0700 MECHANICAL INSULATION SECTION 23 0900 MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 23 0923 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 23 0933 ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 23 2000 GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS SECTION 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALITIES SECTION 23 2500 CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT SECTION 23 3100 DUCTWORK SECTION 23 3213 BUILT UP PLENUM SYSTEMS SECTION 23 3300 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 3423 POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 23 3713 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 23 4116 AIR FILTERS SECTION 23 7300 CUSTOMIZED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 8216 HEATING AND COOLING COILS DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 0000 ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 0501 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0502 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0519 LINE-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 26 2000 LOW (LINE) VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION SECTION 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 26 2913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT ROMNEY BUILDING ----------------------------------------------------------------------- CONSULTANTS HEATH ENGINEERING COMPANY MECHANICAL ENGINEERS 377 West 800 North Salt Lake City, UT 84103 PAYNE ENGINEERING ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS 1823 E. Center Pocatello, ID 83201 03.10.2020 Contractor Re: Invitation to Propose – 2020 ROM HVAC Fan Wall Project No. – 11886 To Whom It May Concern: The University would like to enter into a CM/GC with a GMP contract with your company. Please submit a bid on the above-referenced project. The project consists of the following: The HVAC system supply and return fans in the Romney Building need to be replaced . This project will include replacing these fans with a new built-up air handling unit, including fans, coils, dampers, filters, controls etc. and new releif air fans. The contract award will fall under the University’s Master Services Agreement and associated Contractor approval process. Construction may begin on 07.27.2020. Construction will complete no later than 09.04.2020. Pre-construction services are Not Needed for this project. If pre-construction services are needed a meeting will occur at , in . You will submit your proposal with your sub-contractor bids online via e-Builder no later than 03.20.2020 at 4:00 PM. A performance bond and a labor and materials payment bond for 100% of the contract will be required for any bid proposal over $250,000. We are looking forward to working with you on another great project. Sincerely, Andy Johnson Director, Architecture and Construction Management Services AJ/nm Architecture & Construction Management Services • 283 University Operations • Rexburg, ID 83460-8205 • 208-496-2650 Updated 11/19 1 Notice to Bidders NOTICE TO BIDDERS SECTION 1 – PROJECT: Project Name: 2020 ROM HVAC Fan Wall Project Number: 11886 SECTION 2 – LOCATION: BYU-Idaho Main Campus SECTION 3 – OWNER: BYU-Idaho SECTION 4 – DESIGNER: Heath Engineering Co. SECTION 5 – STANDARD CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS: The bidder is directed to the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, Brigham Young University-Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee with GMP (November 2019). This volume is an integral part of the contract documents and is hereby made a part of the contract. SECTION 6 – TIME OF COMPLETION: Date: 09.04.2020 SECTION 7 – PRECONSTRUCTION SERVICES MEETING: Date: Time: Place: SECTION 8 – RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS: Date: 03.20.2020 Time: 4:00 PM Place: e-Builder The Owner reserves the exclusive right to release all publicity relating to the proposals and the project. SECTION 9 – GENERAL CONTRACTORS: General Contractors will be by invitation only and are selected under BYU-Idaho’s Master Services Agreement. SECTION 10 – DRAWINGS: Drawings are available through e-Builder. END OF NOTICE TO BIDDERS 1 Updated 11/19 Instructions to Bidders INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION 1 -- BIDDING BY INVITATION A. Bidding shall be by written invitation only. Those wanting consideration for such invitation shall apply to: Architecture and Construction Management Services BYU-Idaho 283 University Operations Building Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205 B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids. SECTION 2 -- CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Contract documents may be obtained by the Contractor from: e-Builder.net B. Subcontractors and suppliers who want to obtain Contract documents (plans and specifications) may do so by contacting the invited Contractor. SECTION 3 -- CONTRACT METHOD A. All work specified is to be done under one general contract. Bids will be accepted by the Owner from prime contractors only. SECTION 4 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. If any Bidder doubts the true meaning of any of the Contract documents, or finds errors, discrepancies or omissions, he shall request a clarification from the Architect in writing through e-Builder. Any interpretations or corrections will be made only by written addenda duly issued by the Owner through e- Builder. Requests for clarifications must be submitted to the Architect through e-Builder at least five (5) days before bid opening. Unwritten instructions or interpretations will have no validity. B. Should discrepancies appear in the Contract documents that are not resolved by an addendum, it is expressly understood that the Contractor has used the most expensive method and/or material in its bid. SECTION 5 -- REQUIREMENTS BEFORE SUBMITTING BIDS A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site and structures located there (if any). The Contractor shall thoroughly examine all Contract documents in relation to all conditions that might directly or indirectly affect the contract work. The bid amount shall reflect all such conditions. SECTION 6 -- PREPARING AND SUBMITTING BIDS A. To receive consideration, a bid must be made according to the following instructions: 2 Updated 11/19 Instructions to Bidders 1. Bids shall be prepared on the BYU-Idaho Form of Proposal. All pages including the subcontractor list shall be submitted at the time of bid. 2. Bid Tabulation of Trade Subcontractors shall show the various trade bids in a manner that facilitates easy comparison and determination of the low bidder, with notations explaining post- bid adjustments and rejections. No standard format is provided. 3. Signatures shall be by those authorized to execute the Contract, or by those given authority. 4. The Contractors legal name, business address and telephone number shall be stated. 5. All bids will be submitted and received through e-Builder®. No exceptions. 6. It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to see that the bid is received at the proper time. e-Builder will not accept late bids. 7. Bidders shall accept proposals from only those subcontractors who are approved by the Owner. Contractor will not be required to contract with any Subcontractor against whom it has a reasonable objection. It will be assumed that the question of bonding subcontractors, where considered desirable or necessary by the Contractor, including the cost of such bonds, has been resolved before bids have been submitted. 8. Contractor must demonstrate that their Subcontractor procurement process is done in good-faith, competitively bid between multiple Subcontractor trades for each subcontract. If the Contractor or Owner deems it necessary to sole source a Subcontract, written justification must be submitted with said proposal and must receive Owner approval prior to entering into a Subcontractual relationship. 9. In order for the proposal to be considered valid, two or more Contractors bidding as a "joint venture" must have the written approval of the Owner before submitting a bid. All members of a joint venture shall sign the bid and an official representative of the joint venture shall be designated in the proposal. 10. The term "Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP)" shall be understood to include all work contained in the Contract, excluding any alternates or substitutes. The Owner shall have the right to accept alternates in any order or combination. 11. Substitutes or alternates accepted by the Owner may be included in the Contract or added by Change Order. 12. Contractor shall submit all project documentation and correspondence using the Owner’s Project Management Software, e-Builder®, including, but not limited to; RFI’s, change orders, potential change orders, payment applications, inspection requests, logs, minutes, submittals; or any and all documentation as directed by Owner. SECTION 7 -- APPROVAL OF SUBCONTRACTORS A. The Owner will examine the list of subcontractors submitted with the bids. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any subcontract proposal. SECTION 8 -- FACTORS AFFECTING AWARD OR REJECTION OF BID A. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, or to waive any irregularities or informalities in bids received. The Owner reserves the right to accept the bid that will, in the Owner's opinion, best serve the interests of the Owner regardless of whether such bid is the lowest. SECTION 9 -- PRIOR APPROVALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Several acceptable brands of equipment, manufactured articles or methods of construction may have been identified in the Contract. It is not intended to close the Contract against other brands, articles, or methods that may warrant consideration. However, unspecified materials must have prior approval by the Owner to be considered. 3 Updated 11/19 Instructions to Bidders B. Prior Approvals: Requests for approval of unspecified materials must be made to the Architect. The requests for prior approval shall be considered by the Architect if time permits and if properly documented. The Architect is not bound to consider these items despite their apparent validity. C. Fully detailed technical data, references and other information shall be furnished simultaneously with the requests for prior approval items. D. Such requests shall be reviewed by the Architect and the Owner. If accepted, the approved requests will be included in an addendum. E. The Contractor's "GMP" shall include the furnishing of only those items that are explicitly specified, or which have received prior approval by addendum. F. Substitutions: Any equipment or material supplier and any contractor or subcontractor may, at his option, submit a substitute price and product for any item specified which he feels warrants consideration by the Owner. This proposed substitution is to be listed where indicated on the bid form and shall include the amount by which the GMP would be increased or decreased. G. The Owner may accept or reject any substitute proposed. H. If requested, the Contractor shall furnish information or data concerning the substitute. The Owner may request the Contractor at his own expense to have the substitute tested by an approved testing laboratory. SECTION 10 -- FORM OF CONTRACT A. A copy of the form of the Contract the successful Bidder will be required to execute is included in this specification. SECTION 11 -- ADDENDA A. All addenda issued before bid opening shall be included in the bid and shall be a part of the Contract. SECTION 12 -- REQUIREMENTS IMMEDIATELY AFTER SIGNING THE CONTRACT A. Immediately after signing the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish the following to the Owner: 1. Executed performance, labor and material payment bonds, each in an amount equal to 100 percent of the contract sum as specified in the General Conditions. 2. Insurance certificates as specified in the General Conditions. 3. Submit a Schedule of Value (SOV) process within e-Builder to serve as a basis for making monthly payments to the Contractor. 4. A project schedule as to how he intends to construct the project. This must be, in the opinion of the Owner, a realistic method of analyzing and scheduling each component of the work. It must show when all trades or crafts start and finish their work. This schedule must be reviewed at least monthly and updated as required. A critical path method of scheduling is preferred. If the Contractor cannot produce and maintain such a schedule, this service must be obtained from an outside consultant. The schedule must be approved by the Owner's Representative before the Contractor submits the first payment request. 4 Updated 11/19 Instructions to Bidders B. The Contractor shall issue subcontracts as mutually agreed between the Owner and the Contractor. A complete list of subcontractors and major suppliers including names, addresses and telephone numbers is required within fourteen (14) days of the Owner’s subcontractor review. SECTION 13 -- DISQUALIFICATION If the above requirements are not satisfied, the bid may be disqualified at the discretion of the Owner. END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDER Updated 11/19 Form of Proposal BYU-Idaho FORM OF PROPOSAL NAME OF PROJECT 2020 ROM HVAC Fan Wall PROJECT NUMBER 11886 NAME OF CONTRACTOR DATE OF PROPOSAL The undersigned, hereinafter referred to as the Bidder, certifies that the following facts and/or circumstances have occurred or exist relating to the proposed work for the 2020 ROM HVAC Fan Wall project prepared by Heath Engineering Co. l. That Bidder has received the contract documents for the above-entitled project. 2. That Bidder has received The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-Day Saints BYU-Idaho Standard Contract Requirements, revised February 2018. 3. That Bidder is familiar with such documents, has examined the site of the proposed work, including availability of access, utilities, and other similar items relating to performance of the work and is thoroughly familiar with all general and local conditions which could in any way affect this work. 4. That no verbal agreements or representations with or by any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner exist or have been made to the Bidder and the Bidder in submitting this proposal is in no way relying thereon. 5. That if this proposal is accepted, Bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner in substantially the form contained in the contract documents, and will provide the bonds, insurance coverage and all other items required by the contract documents. 6. The term "Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP)" shall be understood to include all work contained in the contract documents excluding any substitutes or alternates. The Owner will have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination. Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, transportation, services, licenses and permits necessary for the completion of all the work set forth in the contract documents for the sum of: GMP $ Unit Price(s): None Allowance(s): None Updated 11/19 Form of Proposal Alternate(s): None AS FURTHER CONDITIONS OF THIS PROPOSAL: l. The Bidder agrees to complete the work on or before 09.04.2020. 2. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of addenda No. (s) . 3. The Bidder’s contractor’s license number is . 4. Is your bonding capacity adequate for this job? Yes No 5. For verification call . Telephone Number . 6. Is your license limit adequate for this job? Yes No PROPOSED SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS The total sum of the Bidder's proposal shall include the furnishing and installing of all materials, equipment, and labor as called for in the contract documents as a GMP. Hereafter give the total amount to be added or deducted for a complete installation of equipment or materials other than those specified and those approved by addendum are submitted for the Owner's consideration. All materials and equipment proposed for substitution shall be listed below and must meet the requirements of the contract documents. During the time of consideration of the proposals, complete information shall be submitted immediately to the Architect and Owner's Representative. The Contractor is referred to the Instructions to Bidders, Section 9, Prior Approvals and Substitutions for requirements relative to proposed substitutions. Proposed Substitute Manufacturer & Catalog #’s $ Add $ Deduct Updated 11/19 Form of Proposal TYPE OF BIDDER'S ORGANIZATION: Official Name of Organization Corporation, Co-partnership, Individual, or Other Address Name of Individual Members of Firm Name of President of Corporation Name of Secretary of Corporation Corporation is organized under the laws of the State of Signature ( ) )Seal( Title or Office ( ) Legal Address BIDDER'S LIST OF SUBCONTRACT BIDS USED IN PROPOSAL (LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS-MAY USE COSNTRACTORS FORMAT) NAME OF PROJECT: 2020 ROM HVAC Fan Wall PROJECT NUMBER: 11886 OWNER'S NAME: BYU-Idaho DI V . SUBCONTRACT CLASSIFICATIONS SUBCONTRACTOR USED AMOUNT GENERAL CONDITIONS For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S SECTION 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 9 TIME SECTION 2 OWNER SECTION 10 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION SECTION 3 CONTRACTOR SECTION 11 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND SECTION 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE PROPERTY SECTION 5 CONTRACT SUBCONTRACTORS SECTION 12 SECTION 13 INSURANCE AND BONDS UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION SECTION 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR OF WORK BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS SECTION 14 RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES SECTION 7 COST OF THE WORK SECTION 15 TERMINATION SECTION 8 CHANGES IN THE WORK SECTION 16 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS SECTION 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1. DEFINITIONS A. Adverse Weather: weather conditions that are seasonably abnormal and could not reasonably have been anticipated. B. Agreement: the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for a Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project, executed by Owner and Contractor for performance of the Work. C. Allowance: the items identified as such in the Schedule of Values. D. Change In The Work: a modification to the requirements of the Contract Documents or a delay in Substantial Completion resulting from an instruction from Owner or Consultant to Contractor or from another event or circumstance. E. Change Order: a written instrument signed by Owner, Contractor, and Consultant stating their agreement upon the following: (1) the occurrence of a Change in the Work; (2) the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Guaranteed Maximum Price as a result of the Change in the Work; and (3) the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time as a result of the Change in the Work. F. Construction Change Directive: a written order signed by Consultant and Owner which: (1) orders a Change in the Work if the terms of a Change Order cannot be agreed upon prior to performance of a Change in the Work described in Section 8.1 or after occurrence of an event or circumstance described in Section 8.2; and (2) states a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contract Time, or both, resulting from the Change in the Work. G. Consultant: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. H. Contract Documents: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. I. Contract Sum: the total amount set forth in the Agreement payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work. J. Contract Time: the period of time set forth in the Agreement for the Substantial Completion of the Work. K. Contractor: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. L. Cost of the Work: the costs described in Section 7.1 necessarily incurred by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 1 of 27 BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 2 of 27 M. Day: calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. N. Defects or Defective Work: Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet requirements of any inspection, standard, code, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or that has been damaged. O. Drawings: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. P. Field Change: a written order prepared by Consultant and acknowledged by Contractor for a minor Change in the Work consistent with the general intent of the Contract Documents, resulting in no time extension and additional Cost of the Work in the amount of $1,000 or less, and that is necessary to avoid delaying the Work. Q. Guaranteed Maximum Price: the maximum amount Owner is required to pay Contractor for performance of the Work as set forth in the Agreement. R. Modification: a written amendment to the Contract Documents in the form of a: 1. Change Order; 2. Construction Change Directive; or 3. Field Change. S. Owner: the entity identified as such in the Agreement. T. Owner’s Project Management System: the e–Builder or other electronic project management system designated by Owner for the Project. U. Project: the total construction designed by Consultant of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part. V. Product Data: illustrations, schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate details regarding materials or equipment to be used in the Work, or the manner of installation, operation, or maintenance of such materials or equipment. W. Project Manual: the document identified as such in the Agreement. X. Project Site: the site identified as the “Project Site” in the Agreement. Y. Samples and Mock-ups: physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. Z. Schedule of Values: a schedule which allocates the Guaranteed Maximum Price amongst the various portions of the Work. AA. Shop Drawings: drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, patterns, templates, and other data that illustrate some portion of the Work and confirm dimensions and conformance to the Contract Documents specially prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor. BB. Specifications: the documents identified as such in the Agreement. CC. Subcontractor: any entity supplying labor, materials, equipment, construction or services for the Work under separate contract with Contractor or any other Subcontractor. DD. Subcontractor’s Direct Costs: actual costs incurred by a Subcontractor for labor, materials, equipment, insurance, bonds, lower-tier Subcontractors and supervision resulting from a Change in the Work. EE. Submittals: Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups and any other documents or items furnished by Contractor or its Subcontractors to Owner or Consultant to demonstrate how any portion of the Work will be accomplished or the type of materials or products that will be used in such Work. FF. Substantial Completion: completion of the Work to a point where Owner can occupy and use the Work for its intended purposes, as evidenced by a temporary or permanent certificate of occupancy issued by the governmental entity issuing the building permit for the Project and the Consultant’s certification that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion of the Work.. The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified as such by Consultant and accepted by Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 3 of 27 GG. Unforeseen Subsurface Condition: a subsurface condition which neither Contractor nor its Subcontractors were aware of at the time the Agreement was executed and which would not likely have been discovered through a reasonable inspection of the Project Site, or through digging of test holes or other investigation Contractor might reasonably have been expected to conduct, which is materially different from the conditions represented in the Contract Documents or which might reasonably have been expected to exist under the circumstances. HH. Work: all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services required by the Contract Documents. II. Written Notice: notice in writing given from one party to the other at the address, or e-mail (including a duplicate copy through Owner’s Project Management System) listed in the Agreement, or at such other address, or e-mail as the parties will designate from time to time by Written Notice, and will be effective at the earliest of: 1. The date of personal delivery to the other party with signed acknowledgment of receipt; or 2. The date of acknowledgement of receipt by e-mail from the other party that received the notice by e-mail: or 3. The date of receipt by the other party as stated on the return receipt if sent by registered or certified mail, or by courier. 1.2. BUSINESS INTEGRITY A. Contractor covenants and represents that it, and its employees, officers, agents, consultants and Subcontractors have not and will not pay, give or offer or promise to pay or give any money or thing of value to any government official or employee, political party, or candidate for political office (collectively, “Government Recipient”) or any other person, while knowing or having reason to know that all or a portion of such money or thing of value will be paid, given, offered or promised, directly or indirectly, to any Government Recipient, for purposes of obtaining an advantage or influencing any act or decision of a Government Recipient or inducing a Government Recipient to use his, her or its influence with the government or instrumentality thereof to affect or influence any act or decision of such government or instrumentality. B. Contractor shall ensure that any real or potential conflicts of interest are avoided and disclosed promptly to Owner. C. Contractor warrants that it has not and will not pay or receive any contingent fees, funds, kickbacks, benefits, monies, or gratuities to or from other contractors, Subcontractors (of whatever tier), including their agents, officers, employees, owners, subcontractors, or others, from whom they may be liable, to secure preferential treatment and/or to receive benefits or monies beyond the allocation fully disclosed to Owner in the Contract Documents. Contractor further warrants that it has not falsified nor will it falsify or obscure any bid, payment, or other Project related documents. 1.3. CORRELATION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to require Contractor to provide all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary and what is required by any one will be as binding as if required by all. Contractor will perform the Work in accordance with the requirements expressly set forth in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. B. The organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or to establish the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. C. Words used in the Contract Documents that have well known technical or trade meanings are used therein in accordance with such recognized meanings. D. In the interest of brevity, the Contract Documents may omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.4. OWNERSHIP AND USE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents and copies thereof are the property of Owner. Contractor will not use these documents on any other project. Contractor may retain one (1) copy of the Drawings and the Project Manual as a contract record set and will return or destroy all remaining copies following final completion of the Work. 1.5. OWNERSHIP AND USE OF RENDERINGS AND PHOTGRAPHS Renderings representing the Work are the property of Owner. All photographs of the Work, whether taken during performance of the Work or at completion, are the property of the Owner. The Owner reserves all rights including copyrights to renderings and photographs of the Work. No renderings or photographs shall be used or distributed without written consent of the Owner. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 4 of 27 1.6. PUBLIC STATEMENTS REGARDING PROJECT Contractor will not make any statements or provide any information to the media about the Project without the prior written consent of Owner. If Contractor receives any requests for information from media, Contractor will refer such requests to Owner. 1.7. CONFIDENTIALITY / PROPERTY RIGHTS A. Owner will retain ownership and intellectual property rights in all plans, designs, drawings, documents, concepts, and materials provided by or on behalf of Owner to Contractor and to all work products of Contractor for or relative to Work performed under this Agreement, such products, services, and Work of Contractor constituting works made for hire. Contractor will not reuse any portions of such items provided by Owner or developed by Contractor for Owner pursuant to this Agreement, or disclose any such items to any third party without the prior written consent of Owner. Owner may withhold its consent in its’ absolute discretion. B. Contractor shall ensure that Contractor, Subcontractors, and the employees, agents and representatives of Contractor and its Subcontractors maintain in strict confidence, and shall use and disclose only as authorized by Owner all Confidential Information of Owner that Contractor receives in connection with the performance of this Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor may use and disclose any information to the extent required by an order of any court or governmental authority, but only after it has notified Owner and Owner has had an opportunity to obtain reasonable protection for such information in connection with such disclosure. For purposes of this Agreement, “Confidential Information” means: 1. The name or address of any affiliate, customer or contractor of Owner or any information concerning the transactions of any such person with Owner; 2. Any information relating to contracts, agreements, business plans, budgets or other financial information of Owner to the extent such information has not been made available to the public by the Owner; and 3. Any other information that is marked or noted as confidential by the Owner at the time of its disclosure. 1.8. COMPLY WITH INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OF OTHERS Contractor represents and warrants that no Work (with its means, methods, goods, and services attendant thereto), provided to Owner will infringe or violate any right of any third party and that Owner may use and exploit such Work, means, methods, goods, and services without liability or obligation to any person or entity (specifically and without limitation, such Work, means, methods, goods, and services will not violate rights under any patent, copyright, trademark, or other intellectual property right or application for the same). 1.9. NO COMMERCIAL USE OF TRANSACTION OR RELATIONSHIP A. Without the prior written consent of Owner, which Owner may grant or withhold in its sole discretion, neither Contractor nor Contractor’s affiliates, officers, directors, agents, representatives, shareholders, members, Subcontractors, Sub- subcontractors or employees shall make any private commercial use of their relationship to Owner or the Project, including but not limited to: 1. By referring to this Agreement, Owner, or the Project verbally or in any sales, marketing or other literature, letters, client lists, press releases, brochures or other written materials except as may be necessary for Contractor to perform Contractor’s obligations under the terms of this Agreement; 2. By using or allowing the use of any photographs of the Work or any part thereof, or of any service marks, trademarks or trade names or other intellectual property now or which may hereafter be associated with, owned by or licensed by Owner in connection with any service or product; or 3. By contracting with or receiving money or anything of value from any person or commercial entity to facilitate such person or entity obtaining any type of commercial identification, advertising or visibility in connection with the Project. SECTION 2 - OWNER 2.1. OWNER’S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE Owner will designate in writing a representative who will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring Owner’s approval or authorization. Owner’s initial designated representative is the person identified in the Agreement to receive Written Notice for the Owner. 2.2. INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF OWNER A. Owner will be responsible for establishment of property lines and bench marks for Project Site development activities. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 5 of 27 B. Owner will furnish to Contractor digital copies of the Drawings, the Project Manual, and the Addenda through the Owner’s Project Management System. C. Owner will furnish to Contractor any information or services it is required to furnish under the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. 2.3. OWNER'S RIGHT TO INSPECT THE WORK Owner and its representatives will have the right to inspect any portion of the Work wherever located at any time. 2.4. OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If Contractor fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents in a timely manner, Owner may order Contractor in writing to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated. SECTION 3 - CONTRACTOR 3.1. REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR A. By executing the Agreement, Contractor represents that it has visited the Project Site, familiarized itself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated its own observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Contractor will carefully review and compare the Contract Documents and any other available information relating to the Project prior to commencing and during performance of each portion of the Work and will immediately report to Consultant and Owner any errors, inconsistencies, and omissions it discovers. C. Should Contractor or any of its Subcontractors become aware of any question regarding the meaning or intent of any part of the Contract Documents prior to commencing that portion of the Work about which there is a question, Contractor will request an interpretation or clarification from Consultant before proceeding. Contractor proceeds at its own risk if it proceeds with the Work without first making such a request and receiving an interpretation or clarification from Consultant. If neither Contractor nor its Subcontractors become aware of the question until after work on the relevant portion of the Work has commenced, then the following precedence will govern for purposes of determining whether resolution of the question constitutes a Change in the Work: 1. The Agreement takes precedence over all other Contract Documents. 2. The General Conditions take precedence over the Drawings and the Specifications. 3. An Addendum or a Modification takes precedence over the document(s) modified by the Addendum or Modification. 4. The Specifications take precedence over the Drawings. 5. Within the Drawings, larger scale drawings take precedence over smaller scale drawings, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions, and noted materials over graphic indications. D. Contractor will give Consultant written notice of any additional drawings, specifications, or instructions required to define the Work in greater detail, or to permit the proper progress of the Work, sufficiently in advance of the need for information so as not to delay the Work. E. It is not Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with requirements of applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations. However, if Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance with those requirements, Contractor will immediately notify Consultant in writing. Contractor will not proceed unless Owner and/or Consultant makes Modifications to the Contract Documents required for compliance with such requirements. Contractor will be fully responsible for any work knowingly performed contrary to such requirements and will fully indemnify Owner against loss and bear all costs and penalties arising therefrom. F. Contractor will take field measurements and verify field conditions and will compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to Contractor with the Contract Documents before ordering any materials or commencing construction activities. Contractor will immediately report errors, inconsistencies, and omissions that it discovers to Consultant. If Contractor orders materials or commences construction activities before taking field measurements and verifying field conditions, Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation for additional costs to Contractor resulting from field measurements or conditions different from those anticipated by Contractor which would have been avoided had Contractor taken field measurements and verified field conditions prior to ordering the materials or commencing construction activities. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 6 of 27 G. If, in the performance of the Work, Contractor encounters Unforeseen Subsurface Conditions or other Project Site conditions materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents or other information provided by Owner or Consultant to Contractor or which could reasonably have been expected under the circumstances, Contractor will notify Consultant and Owner in writing of such differing Project Site conditions in accordance with the requirements of Section 8.2. Contractor’s failure to do so will constitute a waiver of any entitlement to an adjustment in the Contract Time or Guaranteed Maximum Price as a result of such conditions. H. Where the Contract Documents require Contractor to provide professional architectural or engineering services, Contractor will ensure that such services are performed by appropriately licensed professionals. I. Contractor will submit all project documentation and correspondence using the Owner’s Project Management System, including but not limited to RFI’s, payment applications, inspection requests, logs, minutes, submittals, change order proposals, Change Orders, or any and all other project documentation as directed by Owner. 3.2. SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Contractor will supervise and direct the Work. Contractor will be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work. All loss, damage, liability, or cost of correcting Defective Work arising from the use of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures will be borne by Contractor, notwithstanding that such construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures are referred to, indicated or implied by the Contract Documents, unless Contractor has given timely notice to Owner and Consultant in writing that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures are not safe or suitable, and Owner has then instructed Contractor in writing to proceed at Owner’s risk. B. Contractor will utilize its best skill, efforts, and judgment to provide efficient business administration and supervision, to furnish at all times an adequate supply of workers and materials, and to perform the Work in an expeditious and economical manner consistent with the interests of Owner. C. Contractor will be responsible for: 1. The proper observance of property lines and set back requirements as shown in the Contract Documents; 2. The location and layout of the Work as shown in the Contract Documents with respect to the position of the Work on the property and the elevation of the Work in relation to grade; and 3. Setting and maintaining construction stakes. D. Contractor will be responsible to Owner for the acts and omissions of its employees and Subcontractors as well as persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. E. Contractor will not be relieved of its obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as a result of any tests, inspections, or approvals by Owner, Consultant or their subconsultants. F. Contractor will be responsible for inspections of portions of the Work already completed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent portions of the Work. G. Contractor will remedy or repair all damage or loss to the Work and/or any property of the Owner or any other party caused in whole or in part by Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone for whose acts they are liable. Costs incurred in remedying or repairing such damage or loss shall not constitute a Cost of the Work. H. Contractor recognizes that the Project Site and the surrounding area is frequently visited by the public and is important to Owner’s image and function and will maintain the premises free from debris and waste materials resulting from Work. At the completion of the Work, Contractor shall promptly remove construction equipment, tools, surplus materials, waste materials and debris. 3.3. LABOR AND MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor will provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. B. Contractor will at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among those performing the Work and will not permit employment of any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the tasks assigned to them. C. Contractor is fully responsible for the Project and all materials and work connected therewith until Owner has accepted the Work in writing. Contractor will replace or repair at its own expense any materials or work damaged or stolen, regardless of whether it has received payment for such work or materials from the Owner. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 7 of 27 D. Contractor will be responsible for determining that all materials furnished for the Work meet all requirements of the Contract Documents. Consultant or Owner may require Contractor to produce reasonable evidence that a material meets such requirements, such as certified reports of past tests by qualified testing laboratories, reports of studies by qualified experts, or other evidence which, in the opinion of Consultant or Owner, would lead to a reasonable certainty that any material used, or proposed to be used, in the work meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. All such data will be furnished at Contractor’s expense. This provision will not require Contractor to pay for periodic testing of different batches of the same material, unless such testing is specifically required by the Contract Documents to be performed at Contractor’s expense. E. Contractor will coordinate and supervise the work performed by Subcontractors so that the Work is carried out without conflict between trades and so that no trade, at any time, causes delay to the general progress of the Work. Contractor and all Subcontractors will at all times afford each trade, any separate contractor, or Owner, reasonable opportunity for the installation of Work and the storage of materials. F. Contractor warrants to Owner that the materials and equipment furnished for the Work will be new unless otherwise specified by the Contract Documents, and that the Work will be free from defects, and will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective in the discretion of Owner. If required by Consultant or Owner, Contractor will furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of the materials and equipment used in performing the Work. G. Owner may elect to purchase materials required for the Work. In that event, Contractor will comply with the procedures set forth in the Contract Documents relating to such materials. 3.4. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS Contractor will comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of any public authorities relating to performance of the Work. 3.5. TAXES A. Contractor will pay all privilege, sales, use, consumer, payroll, workers compensation, unemployment, old age pension, surtax, and similar taxes assessed in connection with the performance of the Work. B. Owner will pay all taxes and assessments on the real property comprising the Project Site. 3.6. PERMITS AND FEES A. Owner will obtain and pay for all zoning and use permits and permanent easements necessary for completion of the Work. B. Contractor will obtain and pay for plan checks and the building permit. While such items will constitute a Cost of the Work, Contractor will not be entitled to charge the Contractor’s Fee for the cost of such items. C. Contractor will obtain and pay for all other permits, governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. While such items will constitute a Cost of the Work, Contractor will not be entitled to charge the Contractor’s Fee for the cost of such items. D. Contractor will secure any certificates of inspection and of occupancy required by authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Contractor will deliver these certificates to Consultant prior to issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 3.7. CONTRACTOR'S ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE Contractor will employ a competent representative acceptable to Owner to supervise on-site the performance of the Work. This representative will be designated in writing by Contractor prior to commencement of work and will not be changed prior to completion of all punchlist items listed in the Consultant’s Certificate of Substantial Completion without prior written consent of Owner. This representative will represent Contractor for all purposes, including communication with Owner. 3.8. CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Contractor will prepare and submit for Owner's and Consultant's review and information Contractor's construction schedule for the Work in a format acceptable to Owner. The schedule will show Contractor’s proposed critical path for performance of the Work, dates for the submission of and Consultant’s review of Submittals, dates for ordering of long-lead items, and dates for delivery of Owner-furnished items. 3.9. DOCUMENTS AND SUBMITTALS AT THE PROJECT SITE Contractor will keep at the Project Site for use by Owner, Consultant, or their representatives, a record copy of the Project Manual, the Drawings, all Addenda, all Submittals and all Modifications. The Contractor will maintain these documents and other items in good order and currently marked to record changes and selections made during construction. In addition, BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 8 of 27 Contractor will keep at the Project site one copy of all Submittals. In addition, these currently marked documents showing changes and selections as well as all Submittals will be provided and maintained by Contractor on the Owner’s Project Management System. 3.10. SUBMITTALS A. Submittals are not Contract Documents and do not alter the requirements of the Contract Documents unless incorporated into the Contract Documents by a Modification. B. Contractor will review, approve, and submit to Consultant, through Owner’s Project Management System, Submittals in accordance with the Contract Documents. By approving Submittals, Contractor represents that it has determined and verified field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that it has checked and coordinated each Submittal with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. In reviewing Submittals Consultant will be entitled to rely upon Contractor’s representation that such information is correct and accurate. C. Contractor will inform Consultant in writing at the time of submission of any Submittal or portion thereof which deviates from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor will provide Consultant with documentation demonstrating to Consultant that the Submittal is equal to or better than the specified product or work. Contractor will not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by Consultant’s acceptance of a Submittal unless Contractor has informed Consultant in writing of the deviation and Consultant has incorporated the deviation into the Contract Documents by a Modification. D. Contractor will not perform any portions of the Work requiring Submittals until the respective Submittal has been reviewed and accepted in writing by Consultant. E. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, Owner will be entitled to rely upon such certifications, and neither Owner nor Consultant will be expected to make any independent examination with respect thereto. F. Consultant is not required to take any action with respect to Submittals not required by the Contract Documents. 3.11. CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Contractor will be responsible for any cutting, fitting, and patching that may be required to complete the Work and make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. B. Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with the written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. 3.12. ACCESS TO WORK Contractor will permit Owner, Consultant their representatives and subconsultants access to the Work wherever located at any time. 3.13. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS Contractor will pay all royalties and license fees required by the Work or by Contractor's chosen method of performing the Work. Contractor will defend and hold Owner harmless from all suits or claims for infringement of any patent, license or other intellectual property rights or any loss on account thereof. 3.14. INDEMNIFICATION A. Contractor will indemnify, defend, and hold harmless Owner and Owner's representatives, employees, agents, architects, and consultants from and against any and all claims, damages, liability, demands, costs, judgments, awards, settlements, causes of action, losses and expenses (collectively “Claims” or “Claim”), including but not limited to attorney fees, consultant fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses, arising out of or resulting from the performance of or failure to perform the Work, attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of real or personal property or intangibles, including loss of use resulting therefrom, except to the extent that such liability arises out of the negligence of Owner, its representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity includes, without limitation, indemnification of Owner from all losses or injury to Owner’s property arising out of or resulting from performance of or failure to perform the Work, except to the extent that such loss or injury arises out of the negligence of Owner, its representatives, agents, and employees. This indemnity applies, without limitation, to include Claims occurring both during performance of the Work and/or subsequent to completion of the Work. In the event that any Claim is caused in part by the negligence of a party indemnified hereunder, that party will bear the cost of such Claim to the extent its negligence was the cause thereof. In the event that a claimant asserts a Claim for recovery against any party indemnified hereunder, the party indemnified hereunder may tender the BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 9 of 27 defense of such Claim to Contractor. Contractor will defend the party indemnified hereunder with legal counsel acceptable to the party indemnified hereunder. If Contractor rejects such tender of defense and it is later determined that the negligence of the party indemnified hereunder did not cause all of the Claim, Contractor will reimburse the party indemnified hereunder for all costs and expenses incurred by that party in defending against the Claim. Contractor will not be liable hereunder to indemnify any party for damages resulting from the sole negligence of that party. B. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will be liable to defend Owner in any lawsuit filed by any Subcontractor relating to the Project. Where liens have been filed against Owner's property, Contractor (and/or its bonding company which has issued bonds for the Project) will obtain lien releases and record them in the appropriate county and/or local jurisdiction and provide Owner with a title free and clear from any liens of Subcontractors. In the event that Contractor and/or its bonding company are unable to obtain a lien release, Owner in its absolute discretion may require Contractor to provide a bond around the lien or a bond to discharge the lien, at Contractor's sole expense. C. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor will indemnify and hold Owner harmless from any claim of any other contractor resulting from the performance, nonperformance or delay in performance of the Work by Contractor. D. The indemnification obligation herein will not be limited by a limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or a Subcontractor under worker's compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. E. The indemnification obligations contained herein shall survive the termination or completion of the Agreement up to a period ending the later of 10 years from the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or such longer time as permitted by law for assertion of a claim by the Owner, or by any third party against Owner, resulting from the Work. 3.15. COST CONTROL Contractor will operate a system of cost control for the Work, including regular monitoring of actual costs for activities in progress and estimates for uncompleted tasks and proposed changes. Contractor will identify variances between actual and estimated costs and report the variances to Owner when requested by the Owner. 3.16. PROJECT MEETINGS Contractor will attend and participate in Project meetings as requested by the Owner. SECTION 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1. CONSULTANT In the event that Owner terminates its contractual relationship with Consultant, Owner will appoint in writing another consultant, whose status under the Contract Documents will be that of the former Consultant in all respects. 4.2. CONSULTANT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Consultant will make periodic visits to the Project Site to familiarize itself generally with the progress and quality of the Work and to observe if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Although Consultant is required to make periodic inspections, it is not required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections. On the basis of its observations while at the Project Site, Consultant will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. Consultant’s failure to detect a defect or deficiency in the Work will not relieve Contractor of its duty to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Consultant will review Contractor's payment requests and certify the amounts due Contractor in accordance with Section 10. C. Communications between Contractor and Owner relating to the Work will be through Consultant. Communications between Owner or Contractor with Consultant’s subconsultants relating to the Work will be through Consultant. Communications between Owner or Consultant and Subcontractors relating to the Work will be through Contractor. Communications between Contractor and any separate contractor will be through Owner or Consultant, except as otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. All written communications involving Owner (as well as written communications between Contractor and the Consultant) must satisfy the requirements of Written Notice, including submitting a duplicate copy through the Owner’s Project Management System. D. Owner and/or Consultant will have the right to reject and require removal of the following at Contractor's expense: 1. Any portion of the Work that does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Any portion of the Work damaged or rendered unsuitable during installation or resulting from failure to exercise proper protection. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 10 of 27 E. Consultant will have authority to stop the Work, with concurrence of Owner, whenever such stoppage may be necessary in Consultant’s reasonable opinion to insure the proper performance of the Work. F. Consultant will review Contractor’s Submittals and will accept or take other appropriate action regarding the Submittals within ten (10) working days after receipt of the Submittals. Consultant's review of the Submittals will be for the limited purpose of checking for general conformance with the Contract Documents and will not be conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of Contractor. Consultant's review of Submittals will not relieve Contractor of its obligations under the Contract Documents. Consultant's review of Submittals will not constitute acceptance of safety precautions or construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. Consultant's acceptance of a specific item will not indicate acceptance of an assembly of which the item is a component. G. Consultant will prepare Construction Change Directives and Field Changes in accordance with Section 8. H. Consultant will conduct inspections to determine the dates of Substantial Completion and final completion, will receive and review written guarantees and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by Contractor, and will review and certify or reject Contractor's final payment request. I. Consultant or Owner will be the interpreter of the performance and requirements of the Contract Documents. Consultant's interpretations will be in writing or in the form of drawings. J. Consultant's or Owner’s decisions in matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the Contract Documents. SECTION 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1. AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK A. Contractor will procure bids for subcontract work from at least three (3) qualified bidders unless Owner waives such requirement in writing. Except as provided in Section 5.1, Paragraphs B. and C. below, Contractor will enter into contracts with Subcontractors not owned, related to or controlled by Contractor to perform all portions of the Work. Subcontracts will contain payment provisions consistent with Section 10 and will not be awarded on the basis of cost plus a fee without the prior written consent of Owner. B. If Contractor wishes to self-perform any portion of the Work or subcontract such portion of the Work to an entity owned or controlled by or related to Contractor, Contractor shall: 1. Advise Owner at least thirty (30) days in advance of bid opening that Contractor wishes to self-perform such Work or subcontract it to an entity owned, controlled by or related to Contractor and request Owner’s written approval thereof; 2. Submit to the Owner Contractor’s or such related entity’s bid at least seventy-two (72) hours prior to bid opening; 3. Procure bids for such subcontract Work from at least three qualified bidders unless Owner waives such requirement in writing; and 4. Abide by Owner’s determination as to whether Contractor or another subcontractor will be used to perform such Work. C. If Owner both approves Contractor to self-perform Work and approves Contractor proceeding without obtaining bids from other Contractors, then Contractor’s overhead and profit on Work performed by Contractor’s crews will not be more than the percentage fee stated in the Agreement. D. Contractor will not contract with any Subcontractor who has been rejected by Owner. Contractor will not be required to contract with any Subcontractor against whom it has a reasonable objection. E. If Owner refuses to accept any Subcontractor proposed by Contractor, Contractor will propose an acceptable substitute to whom Owner has no reasonable objection. F. Contractor will require each Subcontractor to: 1. Be licensed by the state in which the Project is located where such licensing is required by the governing authority; 2. Be bound by the terms of the Contract Documents as far as they are applicable to the Subcontractor's work; 3. Assume toward Contractor the same obligations Contractor has assumed toward Owner, including the prompt payment of its Subcontractors; BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 11 of 27 4. Submit its applications for payment to Contractor in time to permit Contractor to make timely application to Owner; 5. Execute claim or lien releases or lien waivers for payments made by Contractor; and 6. Make all claims for Changes in the Work to Contractor in the same manner as Contractor is required to make such claims to Owner. 7. Keep detailed accounting records of all expenses incurred by the Subcontractor in performing the Work for a period of three (3) years following Substantial Completion of the Work, and provide Owner’s accountants access to all such records, including but not limited to books, records, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vendor files, purchase orders, vouchers, memoranda and other data relating to the Work during such three (3) year period. G. Contractor will not make any substitution for any Subcontractor that has been accepted by Owner and Consultant without the prior written approval of Owner and Consultant. 5.2. SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS A. Contractor's responsibility for the Work includes the labor and materials of all Subcontractors, including those recommended or approved by Owner. Contractor will be responsible to Owner for proper completion and guarantee of all workmanship and materials under any subcontracts. Any warranties required for such work will be obtained by Contractor in favor of Owner and delivered to Consultant. It is expressly understood and agreed that there is no contractual relationship between Owner and any Subcontractor, and under no circumstances will Owner be responsible for the non-performance or financial failure of any Subcontractor or any effects therefrom, except to the extent that costs incurred by Contractor resulting from such non- performance or financial failure constitute part of the Cost of the Work payable by Owner to Contractor pursuant to Section 7. B. Contractor agrees to pay the Subcontractors promptly upon receipt of payment from Owner for that portion of the funds received which represents the Subcontractor's portion of the Work completed to Contractor's satisfaction for which payment was made by Owner. C. No subcontract will relieve Contractor of any of its liability or obligations to Owner under the Contract Documents. Contractor agrees that it is fully responsible to Owner for acts or omissions of Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them. SECTION 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1. OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION OR AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. Owner reserves the right to perform construction itself other than the Work or to award separate contracts in connection with the Project. B. Contractor will afford other contractors reasonable opportunity to perform their work and to place and store their materials and equipment on the Project Site and will properly connect and coordinate its Work with theirs where applicable. C. Contractor will secure and protect all such other contractor materials and equipment and work on the Project Site and will hold Owner harmless from any loss or damage pertaining to its securing and protecting of the same. D. If any part of Contractor's Work depends upon the work of any separate contractor for proper performance or results, Contractor will inspect and promptly report to Consultant any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for Contractor’s proper performance of the Work. Failure of Contractor to so inspect and report will constitute an acceptance of the work of the separate contractor as fit and proper to receive Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. E. Contractor will promptly remedy damage caused by Contractor or any Subcontractor to the completed or partially completed work, materials or equipment of other contractors or to the property of Owner or other contractors. Costs incurred in remedying such damage shall not be a Cost of the Work. 6.2. OWNER-PURCHASED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. In addition to Contractor’s other obligations with respect to separate Owner provided work or materials, Contractor’s obligations and duties with respect to Owner-purchased materials, equipment, and work include: 1. Scheduling: The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a schedule of dates on which the Contractor requires delivery of Owner-purchased materials. The Owner will arrange for the materials to be delivered to the construction site or picked up by Contractor on or before the specified dates. If delivery or pick up dates are changed, rescheduled, or otherwise varied from the original schedule, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of delivery or pick up date rescheduling and the Contractor shallcoordinate the delivery or pick up of the Owner-purchased materials or equipment directly with the supplier. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 12 of 27 2. Equipment: If Owner buys equipment for Contractor’s use on the Project, Contractor will (in addition to all other obligations herein relative to such equipment) be fully and solely responsible for such equipment and the use and use consequences thereof for any and all purposes (including without limitation to protect, secure, inspect, upkeep and make repairs, and insure such equipment as well as to monitor, guide, direct, oversee, protect, and control the use and use consequences of such equipment) until completion of the Project and Contractor’s return of such equipment to Owner. 3. Pre-Installation Inspection: The Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, inspecting and storing all Owner- purchased materials and equipment until the materials or equipment are needed for installation or use by the Contractor. Regardless of any inspection performed by the Owner of the Owner-purchased materials or equipment, the Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the Owner-purchased materials and equipment to determine suitability, quality and conformance with specifications before installation or use or at such other times as the Contractor may desire in order to avoid interruptions and delays in the progress of the Project. The Contractor shall reject any material which does not meet specifications or which appears to have any defect which may make the material unsuitable for use in the Project. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and the manufacturer or supplier of all defects and assist the Owner in arranging for the repair, replacement or correction of the defective condition. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of any deadline or completion date which results from failure to discover defects which the Contractor should have discovered through an inspection. 4. Defective Materials: The Contractor acknowledges that use of improper or defective material may result in costs and damages to the Owner in excess of the value of the materials; that after use in the Project it may be difficult or impossible to inspect the material to determine the cause of any failure; and that in the event of the failure of material there may be a question as to the cause of the failure. Because the Contractor's employees will be the last to handle and inspect material prior to incorporation into the Project, the Contractor will be liable to the Owner for damages resulting from failure of Owner- purchased materials during the Contractor's warranty period specified herein from any cause whatsoever unless the Contractor provides clear and convincing proof that (1) the entire loss from a failure is covered by a valid manufacturer's or supplier's warranty, or (2) the Contractor could not have prevented the failure by complying with the requirements of this Section concerning Owner- purchased materials. 5. Claims: The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to present claims to manufacturers and suppliers for defects in Owner-purchased materials. Where there is any question as to the division of liability between the Contractor and a manufacturer or vendor, the Contractor shall provide all relevant information in the Contractor's possession which may aid the Owner in determining the division of responsibility. The Owner shall have final approval of any proposed adjustment or settlement of warranty claims. 6. Implied Warranties: The benefit of contractual and implied warranties with respect to Owner-purchased materials and equipment shall run to the Owner and not to the Contractor. 7. Unloading: Except as otherwise provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for unloading all Owner- purchased materials and equipment and for verifying delivery amounts to the Owner. 8. Custody and Security: The Contractor shall use reasonable care in protecting Owner-purchased materials and equipment from loss, deterioration, damage, theft, vandalism or destruction. 9. Reports: At Owner's request, the Contractor shall furnish reports to the Project Manager demonstrating the Contractor's compliance with this Section. 10. Retained Ownership: All materials and equipment purchased by the Owner which remain after completion of the Project shall be the property of the Owner. If the Owner does not wish to retain or dispose of surplus Owner-purchased materials or equipment, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of them. B. None of the foregoing duties of the Contractor with respect to Owner-purchased materials shall prevent the Owner from exercising any prerogative of ownership of thematerials or equipment. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among Contractor and separate contractors as to the responsibility under their separate contracts for maintaining the Project Site free from waste materials and rubbish, Owner may clean the Project Site, allocate the cost among those responsible as Owner and Consultant determine to be just, and withhold such cost from any amounts due or to become due to Contractor. SECTION 7 - COST OF THE WORK 7.1 EXPENSES INCLUDED IN THE COST OF THE WORK The Cost of the Work will include only the costs set forth in this Section 7.1 incurred by Contractor in performing the Work, subject to the exclusions set forth in Section 7.2 and the credits set forth in Section 7.3. A. Labor costs: BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 13 of 27 1. Actual wages of construction workers directly employed by and as employees of Contractor (not independent contractors) to perform the Work at the Project Site or, with Owner's approval, at off-site workshops. 2. Wages of Contractor's supervisory and administrative personnel (project managers, superintendents, engineers, coordinators, schedulers and accountants, and other clerical staff), but only for time devoted solely to the Project and recorded on time sheets. 3. Costs paid or incurred by Contractor for taxes, insurance, contributions, assessments and benefits required by law or collective bargaining agreements and, for personnel not covered by such agreements, customary benefits such as sick leave, medical and health benefits, holidays, vacations and pensions, provided such costs are based on wages and salaries included in the Cost of the Work under Section 7.1, Paragraph A., subparagraphs 1 and 2. B. Subcontract costs: 1. Payments made for the Work by Contractor to Subcontractors in accordance with the requirements of the relevant subcontracts. 2. Costs incurred by Contractor in taking over, in whole or in part, the work of a Subcontractor or replacing a Subcontractor for cause. C. Cost of materials and equipment incorporated in the Work: 1. Cost, including transportation, of materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 2. Cost of materials described in Section 7.1, Paragraph C., subparagraph 1 in excess of those actually installed but required to provide reasonable allowance for waste and spoilage. (Cost for excess materials beyond those needed for such reasonable allowance are not a Cost of the Work). D. Costs of other materials, equipment, temporary facilities and related items: 1. Reasonable costs for transportation, installation, maintenance, dismantling and removal of materials, supplies, temporary facilities, machinery, equipment, and hand tools not customarily owned by the construction workers, which are provided by Contractor at the Project Site and fully consumed in the performance of the Work; and the cost less salvage value on such items if not fully consumed, whether sold to others or retained by Contractor. The cost of items previously used by Contractor will be their fair market value. 2. Rental charges for temporary facilities, machinery, equipment, and hand tools not customarily owned by the construction workers, which are provided by Contractor at the Project Site, whether rented from Contractor or others, and costs of transportation, installation, minor repairs and replacements, dismantling and removal thereof. The quantities of and rates for such equipment rented will be subject to Owner's approval in advance. Rental rates will not exceed the prevailing rental rates in the Project locale for similar equipment. In addition, in no event shall the rental rates for Contractor-owned equipment be more than seventy-five percent (75%) of the yearly, monthly, or daily rates, as applicable, established in the current edition of Rental Rate Blue Book or seventy-five percent (75%) of the prevailing yearly, monthly, or daily rental rates, as applicable, in the locale, whichever is lowest. 3. Costs of removal of debris from the Project Site. 4. Costs of postage, parcel delivery, land line telephone service at the Project Site, reasonable petty cash expenses of the Project Site office, and copy machine services at the Project Site. (Computer, internet, network and cellular phone charges may be included as a Cost of the Work only as approved by the Owner in writing prior to the start of Work). 5. The reasonable travel and subsistence expenses of Contractor's personnel incurred while traveling more than 100 miles from the Contractor’s nearest office in the discharge of duties relating to the Work as agreed to in advance by Owner in writing. Reimbursement for air travel shall be at the lowest basic fare only. E. Miscellaneous costs: 1. That portion of Contractor’s premiums for insurance and bonds required by the Contract Documents and directly attributable to the Work but not benefitting any other project. (Contractor will not be entitled to a Contractor’s Fee on these costs.) 2. Privilege, sales, use or similar taxes imposed by a governmental authority which are related to the Work, including without limitation use tax on Owner provided materials which are installed by Contractor. 3. Fees or assessments for permits, licenses and inspections which are related to the Work. (Contractor will not be entitled to a Contractor’s Fee on these costs.) BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 14 of 27 4. Cost of tests except those costs which result from the fault or negligence of Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is liable or from Contractor’s failure to perform its obligations under the Contract Documents. 5. Royalties and license fees paid for the use of a particular design, process or product required by the Contract Documents. 6. Deposits lost for causes other than Contractor's fault or negligence. (Contractor shall submit to Owner a list of refundable and lost deposits with each pay request.) 7. Legal, mediation and arbitration costs, other than those arising from disputes between Owner and Contractor, approved in advance in writing by Owner and reasonably incurred by Contractor in the performance of the Work. 8. Other costs incurred in the performance of the Work to the extent approved in advance in writing by Owner. 9. Costs incurred by Contractor in taking action to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in case of an emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, as provided in Section 11.3 so long as such emergency was not caused by Contractor or any entity for whose acts Contractor is liable. 7.2 EXPENSES NOT INCLUDED IN THE COST OF THE WORK Notwithstanding Section 7.1, the following expenses will not be included in the Cost of the Work: A. Salaries and other compensation of Contractor's personnel stationed at Contractor's principal office or offices other than the Project Site office, except personnel providing support for the Work pursuant to Section 7.1. B. Expenses of Contractor's principal office and offices other than the Project Site office. C. Overhead and general expenses, except as may be expressly included in Section 7.1. D. Incentive plans such as profit sharing and/or bonuses paid by Contractor voluntarily for any reason or that include a vesting schedule. E. Incentive awards of any kind, unless approved in advance by Owner based upon a benefit to the Project. F. Training costs, whether or not associated with the Project, unless approved in advance in writing by the Owner based upon a benefit to the Project. G. Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work. H. Rental costs of machinery and equipment, except as specifically provided in Section 7.1, Paragraph D, subparagraph 2. I. All costs incurred in repairing or correcting Defective or damaged Work or other work or property of the Owner or other contractors or entities. J. Costs resulting from Contractor’s failure to perform any of its obligations to Owner set forth in the Contract Documents including without limitation liquidated damages. K. Costs of food or refreshments for construction meetings or in association with the Project, unless approved in advance by the Owner based upon a benefit to the Project. L. Deductible amounts under all insurance. M. Any type of loss that would be covered by a builders risk insurance policy. N. Costs incurred in uncovering work covered prior to giving the notice required under Section 13.1. O. Any premium or additional cost resulting from “overtime” or “holiday” labor, unless agreed to in advance in by Owner. P. Any cost not specifically and expressly described in Section 7.1. Q. All costs which would cause the Contract Sum to exceed the Guaranteed Maximum Price. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 15 of 27 7.3 DISCOUNTS, REBATES, REFUNDS AND PROCEEDS OF SALES A. Cash discounts, trade discounts, rebates, refunds and the proceeds from sale of excess materials and equipment will be treated as follows: 1. Cash discounts obtained on payments made by Contractor will accrue to Owner if (1) before making the payment, Contractor included them in a payment request and received payment therefor from Owner, or (2) Owner has deposited funds with Contractor with which to make payments; otherwise, cash discounts will accrue to Contractor. 2. Trade discounts, rebates, refunds and proceeds from sales of excess materials and equipment will accrue to Owner, and Contractor will make provisions so that they can be secured. B. Amounts which accrue to Owner in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.3, Paragraphs A. and B. will be credited to Owner as a deduction from the Cost of the Work. 7.4 ALLOWANCES A. Contractor shall include in the Guaranteed Maximum Price all allowance items shown in the Contract Documents. Allowance items shall be supplied by and for such amounts as may be directed by Owner, but Contractor shall not be required to employ any person against whom Contractor has a reasonable objection. Allowance amounts shall include both labor and material costs. B. If the actual cost of performing an allowance item is less than the allowance amount for that item, Owner shall be entitled to the savings resulting therefrom and the Guaranteed Maximum Price will be reduced by a Change Order in the amount of such savings. If the actual cost of performing an allowance item is greater than the allowance amount for that item, the Guaranteed Maximum Price will be increased by a Change Order in the amount of the increased cost of performing the allowance item. SECTION 8 - CHANGES IN THE WORK 8.1. CHANGES IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN INSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR CONSULTANT TO CONTRACTOR A. If Owner or Consultant gives Contractor an instruction which modifies the requirements of the Contract Documents or delays Substantial Completion, Contractor or Owner may be entitled to an adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price and/or the Contract Time. If compliance with the instruction will affect the cost to Contractor to perform the Work, the Guaranteed Maximum Price will be adjusted to reflect the reasonable net increase or decrease in the Cost of the Work, subject to the conditions set forth in Section 8.1, Paragraphs B through G. If compliance with the instruction will delay Substantial Completion, the Contract Time will be extended for a period of time commensurate with such delay subject to the conditions set forth in Section 8.1, Paragraphs B through G and Section 8.3. B. If Contractor receives an instruction from Owner or Consultant which Contractor considers to be a Change in the Work, Contractor, before complying with the instruction, will notify Consultant in writing that Contractor considers such instruction to constitute a Change in the Work. If Consultant agrees that compliance with the instruction will constitute a Change in the Work, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Modification in accordance with Section 8.1, Paragraphs C. and D. within ten (10) days. C. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price (including without limitation costs related to a time extension) as a result of an instruction by Owner or Consultant, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Change Order containing a price breakdown itemized as required by Owner. The break down will be in sufficient detail to allow Owner to determine any increase or decrease in the Cost of the Work as a result of compliance with the instruction. Any amount claimed for Subcontractors will be supported by a similar price breakdown and will itemize the Subcontractor’s Direct Costs, profit and overhead charges resulting from the Change in the Work. Profit and overhead will be subject to the following limitations: 1. The Subcontractor’s profit and overhead will not exceed twelve percent (12%) of Subcontractor’s Direct Costs on work performed. Subcontractor’s profit and overhead will not exceed five (5) percent on work performed by its sub-subcontractors. 2. Contractor's profit and overhead on work performed by its own crews will not exceed ten percent (10%) of its Direct Costs for such work. 3. Contractor's mark up on changes to the Work will be the fee percentage stated in the Agreement. 4. Amounts due Owner as a result of a credit change will be the actual net decrease in the Contractor’s Costs of the Work to perform the Work as a result of the Change in the Work. Overhead and profit for the Change Order will be calculated based on the net increase or decrease in Contractor’s Costs of the Work resulting from the Change in the Work. D. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an instruction from Owner or Consultant, Contractor will include in its proposal justification to support Contractor's claim that compliance with the instruction will delay Substantial Completion. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 16 of 27 E. Upon receipt of Contractor’s proposal for Modification, Consultant and Owner will determine whether to proceed with the Change in the Work. If Consultant and Owner determine to proceed with the Change in the Work, they will issue a Change Order, a Construction Change Directive or a Field Change as appropriate. F. Contractor agrees that if it complies with an instruction from Owner or Consultant without first giving written notice to Consultant as provided in Section 8.1., Paragraph B, and receiving a Change Order, Construction Change Directive or Field Change, Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price or the Contract Time as a result of the instruction and waives any claim therefor. G. If Contractor is instructed to perform work which it claims constitutes a Change in the Work but which Owner and Consultant do not agree constitutes a Change in the Work, Contractor will comply with the instruction. Contractor may submit its claim for adjustment to the Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contract Time, or both as a dispute pursuant to Section 14 within thirty (30) Days after compliance with the instruction. Contractor agrees that if it fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 14 within thirty (30) Days after compliance with the instruction, then Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price or the Contract Time as a result of the instruction and waives any claim therefor. H. Contractor is responsible for submitting accurate cost and pricing data to support its Change Order proposals. Contractor acknowledges that during performance of the Work, there may not be sufficient time for Owner to verify Contractor’s data supporting a Change Order proposal. Owner will have the right during performance of the Work and for a period of three (3) years after final payment to examine Contractor’s books and records to verify the accuracy and appropriateness of the pricing data used to price Change Order proposals. If Contractor has not submitted accurate cost and pricing data or has priced Change Order proposals inconsistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor will refund to Owner any amounts over and above those allowed under the Contract Documents, irrespective of whether Owner has approved and/or signed a Change Order based upon the inaccurate or improper cost and pricing data. 8.2. CHANGES IN THE WORK RESULTING FROM AN EVENT OR CIRCUMSTANCE A. If an event or circumstance other than an instruction from Owner or Consultant affects the cost to Contractor of performing the Work or delays Substantial Completion, Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price and/or the Contract Time. If the circumstance or event affects the cost to Contractor to perform the Work and is caused by a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Consultant or an Unforeseen Subsurface Condition, the Guaranteed Maximum Price will be adjusted to reflect the reasonable increase or decrease in the Cost of the Work resulting from the event or circumstance, subject to the conditions set forth in Section 8.2, Paragraphs B through F. If the event or circumstance delays Substantial Completion and is described in Section 8.3, Paragraph A, the Contract Time will be extended for a period of time commensurate with such delay subject to the conditions set forth in such section. Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment to the Guaranteed Maximum Price from Owner as a result of any event or circumstance unless the event or circumstance results from a willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Consultant or an Unforeseen Subsurface Condition. B. If a Change in the Work results from any event or circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Consultant or an Unforeseen Subsurface Condition, Contractor will give Owner Written Notice of such event or circumstance within twenty-four (24) hours after commencement of the event or circumstance so that Owner can take such action as is necessary to mitigate the effect of the event or circumstance. Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in either the Contract Time or the Guaranteed Maximum Price based on any damages or delays resulting from such event or circumstance during a period more than twenty-four (24) hours prior to Contractor giving such Written Notice to Owner. C. Contractor will submit in writing any claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time and/or the Guaranteed Maximum Price resulting from an event or circumstance within the time limits set forth below. In the event that Contractor fails to submit its claim in writing within the time limits set forth below, then Contractor agrees it will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time or the Guaranteed Maximum Price or to any other damages from Owner due to the circumstance or event and waives any claim therefor. 1. Claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time due to Adverse Weather will be made by the tenth of the month following the month in which the delay occurred. 2. Claims for an adjustment in the Contract Time and/or the Guaranteed Maximum Price due to any other circumstance or event will be submitted within seven (7) Days after the occurrence of the circumstance or event. D. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price (including without limitation costs related to a time extension) because of an event or circumstance resulting from the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Consultant or an Unforeseen Subsurface Condition, Contractor will furnish a proposal for a Change Order containing a price breakdown as described in Section 8.1, Paragraph C. Any amount claimed for increased labor costs as a result of the event or circumstance must be supported by payroll documentation. Any claim for rented equipment or additional material costs must be supported by invoices. E. If Contractor claims that it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as a result of an event or circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Consultant or an Unforeseen Subsurface Condition, Contractor will include with its claim copies of daily logs, letters, shipping orders, delivery tickets, Project schedules, and other supporting information necessary to justify Contractor’s claim that such delayed Substantial Completion. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 17 of 27 F. Within thirty (30) Days after receipt of Contractor's claim, Consultant will either deny the claim or recommend approval to Owner. If Owner approves the claim, the adjustment in the Contract Time and/or Guaranteed Maximum Price will be reflected in a Change Order pursuant to Section 8.5 or a Construction Change Directive pursuant to Section 8.6. If Owner or Consultant denies Contractor's claim, Contractor may submit its claim as a dispute pursuant to Section 14 within thirty (30) Days of receipt of the denial of the claim. If Contractor fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 14 within the thirty (30) Day time period, then Contractor agrees it is not entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time and/ or Guaranteed Maximum Price or any other damages as a result of the event or circumstance and waives any claim therefor. 8.3. EXTENSIONS OF TIME A. If Substantial Completion of the Project is delayed because of any of the following causes, then the Contract Time will be extended by Change Order for a period of time equal to such delay: 1. Labor strikes or lock-outs; 2. Adverse Weather; 3. Unusual delay in transportation; 4. Unforeseen governmental requests or requirements; 5. A Change in the Work resulting from an instruction by Owner or Consultant to Contractor subject to the conditions set forth in Section 8.1.; 6. Unforeseen Subsurface Condition; or 7. Any other event or circumstance caused by the willful or negligent act or omission of Owner or Consultant. B. Contractor will not be entitled to any compensation for delay described in Section 8.3, Paragraph A, subparagraphs 1, 2, 3 and 4. C. In no event will any time extension or cost adjustment be given on account of delay which reasonably should have been anticipated by the Contractor or in circumstances where performance of the Work is, was, or would have been, delayed by any other cause for which the Contractor is not entitled to an extension. 8.4. DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGES IN THE WORK Every Change in the Work will be documented by a Change Order, a Construction Change Directive or a Field Change. If Owner, Consultant and Contractor reach agreement regarding the adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price, if any, and the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any, resulting from a Change in the Work, then the parties will execute a Change Order pursuant to Section 8.5. If Owner, Consultant and Contractor cannot reach agreement regarding the adjustment in Guaranteed Maximum Price or the adjustment in Contract Time resulting from a Change in the Work, then Owner and Consultant will issue a Construction Change Directive pursuant to Section 8.6. Field Changes require the agreement of Owner, Consultant and Contractor. 8.5. CHANGE ORDERS Contractor's signature upon a Change Order is Contractor's acknowledgment that it is not entitled to any additional adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price or the Contract Time or any other damages or compensation as a result of the Change in the Work other than that provided for in the Change Order, irrespective of whether a subsequent claim for additional compensation or time extensions relating to the Change in the Work is described as a change in the requirements of the Contract Documents, a delay, a disruption of the Work, an acceleration of the Work, an impact on the efficiency of performance of the Work, an equitable adjustment, or other claim and irrespective of whether the impact of the Change in the Work is considered singly or in conjunction with the impact of other Changes in the Work. 8.6. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. Contractor will promptly comply with all Construction Change Directives. B. Pending final resolution of any adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price or Contract Time relating to a Construction Change Directive, the amounts proposed by Owner in the Construction Change Directive may be included in Contractor's payment requests once the work relating thereto is completed. C. If after the work described in the Construction Change Directive is completed, Owner, Consultant, and Contractor reach agreement on any adjustments in the Guaranteed Maximum Price and Contract Time, such agreement will be reflected in an appropriate Change Order. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 18 of 27 D. If the parties do not reach agreement regarding an adjustment to the Guaranteed Maximum Price, Contract Time, or both relating to the Construction Change Directive within thirty (30) Days of the completion of the work described therein, then Contractor may submit its claim for an adjustment pursuant to Section 14 within thirty (30) Days of the completion of such work. Contractor agrees that if it fails to submit its claim for resolution pursuant to Section 14 within thirty (30) Days of completion of the work described in the Construction Change Directive, then it will not be entitled to an adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price or Contract Time resulting from such work except as set forth in the Construction Change Directive and waives any claim therefor. 8.7. FIELD CHANGES Consultant, Owner and Contractor will sign a Field Change order listing the Change In the Work before Contractor proceeds with the Field Change. 8.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS Except as set forth in this Section 8, Contractor will not be entitled to any adjustment in the Guaranteed Maximum Price or the Contract Time or for any damages of any kind whatsoever resulting from an instruction from Owner or Consultant, any event or circumstance, or any act or omission of Owner or Consultant, and Contractor expressly waives any and all claims therefor. SECTION 9 - TIME 9.1. TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. By executing the Agreement, Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. Contractor will proceed expeditiously with adequate resources and will achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 9.2. COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK Contractor will not commence work on the Project Site until the date set forth in the Written Notice to proceed. However, Contractor may enter into subcontracts and secure material for the Project after receipt of the Agreement with Owner's authorized signature. Owner will issue the Written Notice to proceed within forty-five (45) Days after Owner receives acceptable bonds and evidence of insurance pursuant to Section 12 unless Owner earlier terminates the Agreement pursuant to Section 15. 9.3. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK A. When Contractor believes it has achieved Substantial Completion of the Work (including having procured a temporary or permanent certificate of occupancy), it will provide Written Notice thereof to Owner and Consultant. Owner and Consultant will thereafter inspect the Work to determine if Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion of the Work. If so, Consultant shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. At the time Consultant certifies that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion, Consultant will identify the remaining items to be completed for final completion of the Work and will establish with Contractor a reasonable time for completion of those items. Consultant will set forth the items to be completed and the time established for their completion in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 9.4. DELAY IN COMPLETION OF THE WORK A. For each Day after the expiration of the Contract Time that Contractor has not achieved Substantial Completion, Contractor will pay Owner the amount set forth in the Agreement as liquidated damages for Owner's loss of use of the Project and the added administrative expense to Owner to administer the Project during the period of delay. In addition, Contractor will reimburse Owner for any additional consultant fees, attorney fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay. The parties have agreed on this liquidated damages provision because actual damages which will result from a delay in Substantial Completion cannot readily be ascertained at the time of execution of the Agreement and the parties wish to fix such damages as a their reasonable estimate of such actual damages, and not as a penalty. Owner may deduct any liquidated damages or reimbursable expenses from any money due or to become due to Contractor. If the amount of liquidated damages and reimbursable expenses exceeds any amounts due to Contractor, Contractor will pay the difference to Owner within ten (10) Days after receipt of a written request from Owner for payment B. For each Day that Contractor exceeds the time allowed for completion of the remaining items set forth in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor will pay to Owner as liquidated damages for additional administrative expenses the amount set forth in the Agreement. In addition, Contractor will reimburse Owner for any additional Consultant's fees, attorney fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses incurred by Owner as a result of the delay in completing such items. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 19 of 27 SECTION 10 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10.1. SCHEDULE OF VALUES Contractor will submit to Consultant and Owner with its signed Agreement the Schedule of Values on a form approved by Owner. The Schedule of Values will be supported by any other data required by Owner to substantiate its accuracy and will be the basis for Contractor's payment requests. Specific allowance line item amounts will not be transferred from one line item to another without Owner’s consent. All contingency will be identified as line item amount and will be included in the Guaranteed Maximum Price. Contingency will not be used without Owner’s consent. 10.2. PAYMENT REQUESTS A. No more than once a month, Contractor will submit to Consultant and Owner a payment request on a form approved by Owner for Work completed, materials stored on the Project Site, and materials stored off-site in a bonded warehouse approved by Owner, as of the date of the payment request. (If and as often as requested by Owner, Contractor will assist Owner in visiting the bonded warehouse and validating items in the bonded warehouse.) The amount of the payment request will be based upon the Schedule of Values submitted by Contractor and will be equal to: 1. The Cost of the Work incurred by Contractor as of the last day of the prior calendar month. (Contractor will provide with the payment request supporting documentation in an electronic format approved by Owner, including Contractor’s Project cost ledger, payroll records, invoices, Subcontractor payment applications, and any other documents reasonably requested by Owner or Consultant.) 2. Plus the Contractor's Fee for the Work completed. 3. Less retention amounts specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Less all prior amounts paid by Owner to Contractor as part of the Contract Sum. 5. Less allowable offsets. The payment request may include Changes in the Work that have been performed by Contractor and authorized by Owner and/or Consultant pursuant to Section 8. If a payment request includes materials stored offsite, Contractor will include with the payment request a list of the materials, the material vendor’s invoices to Contractor, the location where they are stored and the written request of Contractor and its performance bond surety that payment be made for such materials. B. Contractor warrants and guarantees that upon the receipt of payment for materials and equipment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, title to such materials and equipment will pass to Owner free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances. Notwithstanding this payment and passage of title, Contractor will remain responsible for all such materials and equipment until actual delivery to the Project Site, incorporation into the Work and final acceptance by Owner. Contractor further warrants that no material or equipment covered by a payment request is subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or any other person or entity. 10.3. PAYMENT REQUEST CERTIFICATION A. Consultant will, within seven (7) Days after receipt of Contractor's payment request, forward to Owner the payment request certified for such amount as Consultant determines is properly due. If Consultant certifies less than the full amount of the payment request, Consultant will notify Contractor and Owner of Consultant's reasons for withholding certification of the full amount requested. B. The certification of the payment request will constitute a representation by Consultant to Owner based upon Consultant's observations at the Project Site and the data comprising the payment request, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of Consultant's knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by Consultant. However, the certification of the payment request will not constitute a representation that Consultant has: 1. Conducted exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quantity or quality of the Work; 2. Reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; 3. Reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors or other data requested by Owner to substantiate Contractor's right to payment; or BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 20 of 27 4. Made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. C. In taking action on Contractor’s payment request, Owner will be entitled to rely on the accuracy and completeness of the information furnished by Contractor. 10.4. DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION AND PAYMENT A. Consultant may withhold certification of a payment request in whole or in part to the extent reasonably necessary to protect Owner if, in the opinion of Consultant, the representations to Owner required by Section 10.3, Paragraph B cannot be accurately made. If Consultant is unable to certify payment in the amount of the payment request, Consultant will notify Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 10.3, Paragraph A. If Contractor and Consultant cannot agree on a revised amount, Consultant will promptly certify a payment request for the amount for which Consultant is able to make such representations to Owner. Consultant may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a payment request previously certified, to such extent as may be necessary in Consultant's opinion to protect Owner from loss because of: 1. Defective Work not remedied; 2. Third-party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims; 3. Failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors for labor, materials, equipment, construction or services; 4. Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Guaranteed Maximum Price; 5. Damage to Owner or another contractor for which Contractor is responsible; 6. Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time and that the unpaid balance will not be adequate to cover the cost of completing the Work and damages for the anticipated delay; or 7. Contractor's persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Owner reserves the right to withhold payments to Contractor, subsequent to Consultant's certification of any payment request, in order to protect Owner from loss due to any condition described in Section 10.4, Paragraph A. Upon satisfactory resolution of any such conditions, payments so withheld will be made. 10.5. PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Owner will pay Contractor progress payments within the parameters of Sections 10.2 through 10.4 within thirty (30) Days after: 1. Contractor has submitted a progress payment request; 2. Contractor has obtained conditional waiver and release upon progress payment documents executed by each of the subcontractors performing work and/or providing materials covered by the Contractor’s progress payment request; and 3. Owner receives the certified payment request from Consultant. B. Owner will make payments to Contractor by either placing the payments in the mail addressed to Contractor or by electronic transfer at Owner’s discretion. C. Upon receipt of any payment from Owner, Contractor will pay to each Subcontractor the amount paid to Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. D. Contractor will maintain a copy of each payment request at the Project Site for review by the Subcontractors. E. No payment made under the Contract Documents, either in whole or in part, will be construed to be an acceptance of defective or improper materials or workmanship. F. Owner may withhold 5% retention from each payment request. G. Contractor will pay any unpaid retention, less any amounts withheld pursuant to Section 10.4 or other offsets, within thirty (30) Days after Contractor achieves Substantial Completion, submits its payment request for retained funds, delivers to Consultant Contractor’s Substantial Completion Affidavit and Consent of Surety fully executed by Contractor and its surety, and obtains Waiver and Release documents executed by all subcontractors and suppliers having claim against the retained funds, and Owner receives a certificate of occupancy. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 21 of 27 10.6. FINAL PAYMENT A. Upon completion of the Work including all of the remaining items of Work identified in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor will give written notice of the same to Consultant and provide Consultant with Contractor’s final payment request. Upon receipt of such notice and payment request, Consultant will promptly inspect the Work. If the Consultant finds that the Work (including all remaining items of Work identified in the Certificate of Substantial Completion) has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, Consultant will certify the final payment request. Following such certification, Contractor will submit to Owner its final accounting of the Cost of the Work together with its final cost ledgers in an electronic format approved by Owner. Owner's accountants will review and report in writing to the Contractor their comments on Contractor's final accounting within thirty (30) Days after delivery of the final accounting to Owner by Contractor. B. If Owner's accountants report the Cost of the Work as substantiated by Contractor's final accounting to be less than claimed by Contractor, Contractor will be entitled to submit the matter as a dispute pursuant to Section 14. Contractor will make such submission within thirty (30) Days after Contractor's receipt of the report from Owner’s accountants. If Contractor does not submit the matter as a dispute within said thirty (30) day period, the final Cost of the Work will be as determined by Owner’s accountants. Pending a final resolution of the dispute, Owner will pay Contractor the amount established by Owner’s accountants. C. Owner will make full and final payment within thirty (30) Days of the completion of all of the following requirements: 1. Consultant has declared to Owner in writing that the Work is complete; 2. Contractor has obtained and provided to Owner a permanent certificate of occupancy; 3. Contractor has obtained and provided to Consultant conditional or unconditional releases or waivers of lien from all Subcontractors performing work and/or providing labor, materials, or equipment for the Project; 4. Contractor has submitted to Owner Contractor’s final accounting for the Cost of the Work and Contractor’s final payment request as set forth in Section 10.6, Paragraph A.; 5. Owner’s accountants have reviewed and approved Contractor’s final accounting for the Cost of the Work; 6. Contractor has submitted to Owner the Contractor’s final payment request; and 7. Contractor has provided Owner with documentation (including final invoices) reconciling actual costs of insurance and bonds with the original estimates of such costs. 8. Contractor has collected and provided to Owner all manufacturers’ and other guaranties and warranties, properly signed and endorsed to Owner, that are required by the Contract Documents that extend for a period beyond one year after substantial completion. (Delivery of such guaranties and warranties will not relieve Contractor for any obligation assumed under any other provision of the Contract Documents.) D. The amount of the final payment will be calculated as follows: 1. Take the Cost of the Work which Owner’s accountants have determined is substantiated by Contractor's final accounting and Contractor's Fee, but not more than the Guaranteed Maximum Price; 2. Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by Owner; and 3. Subtract the amount of any withholdings pursuant to Section 10.4 and other offsets that Contractor owes to Owner. E. If the aggregate of previous payments made by Owner exceeds the amount due Contractor, Contractor will reimburse the difference to Owner within ten (10) Days after receipt of Written Notice from Owner requesting such payment. F. Acceptance of final payment by Contractor or any Subcontractor will constitute a waiver of claims by the payee except for those claims previously made in writing pursuant to Section 8 and identified by Contractor in its affidavit as still pending. 10.7. AUDIT RIGHTS A. Contractor will keep full and detailed accounts of all expenses incurred in performing the Work and exercise such controls as may be necessary for proper financial management under the Contract Documents. The accounting and control systems will be satisfactory to Owner. Owner and Owner's accountants will be afforded access to Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, Subcontractor files, purchase orders, vouchers, memoranda and other data relating to the Work. Contractor will preserve these documents for a period of three (3) years after final payment. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 22 of 27 B. Owner shall have the right during performance of the Work and for a period of three (3) years from the date of final payment, to audit all of Contractor’s books and records relating to any Cost of the Work and/or Change Orders relating to the Project. Such books and records include contracts, invoices, payment requests, accounts receivable documents, accounts payable documents, payroll records, time cards, leases, Subcontractor files, communications, ledgers, and any other documents relating to the Project. Contractor shall provide Owner’s employees, auditors and consultants full and complete access to such books and records during such time upon at least three (3) business days’ notice. Contractor shall permit Owner’s representatives to make copies of such books and records. C. In the event that Owner’s audit reveals that Contractor has been paid more than it is entitled to under the Contract Documents, Contractor shall refund to Owner the overpayment within ten (10) days after receipt of a demand for payment. If the amount of the overpayment exceeds one percent (1%) of the final Cost of the Work, Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the cost of conducting the audit within ten (10) Days after receipt of the demand for payment. SECTION 11 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11.1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS Contractor will be responsible to Owner for initiating and supervising all safety programs in connection with the performance of the Work. 11.2. SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Contractor will take reasonable precautions in the performance of the Work to prevent damage, injury, or loss to the Work, persons and property. B. Contractor will give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and other lawful requirements of public authorities bearing on the safety or protection of persons and property. No Work will be performed that may pose an undue safety hazard to Contractor, Contractor’s employees, or any other person. Contractor will immediately give Written Notice to Owner and Consultant of any injury to persons or property on the Project Site. C. Contractor will designate a responsible member of its organization at the Project Site whose duty will be the prevention of accidents. This person will be Contractor's on-Site superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by Contractor to Owner and Consultant. 11.3. EMERGENCIES In case of an emergency endangering life or threatening the safety of any person or property, Contractor may, without waiting for specific authorization from Consultant or Owner, act at its own discretion to safeguard persons or property. Contractor will immediately notify Consultant and Owner of such emergency action and make a full written report to Consultant and Owner within five (5) days after the event. 11.4. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS In the event Contractor encounters on the Site material reasonably believed to be hazardous materials which have not been rendered harmless, Contractor shall immediately stop work in the area affected by the materials and report the condition in writing to Owner and Consultant. Work in the affected area shall not be resumed until the materials have been removed or otherwise rendered harmless and the Owner and Consultant have approved recommencement of work in the affected area. 11.5. OTHER SAFETY PROVISIONS A. When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities only under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. B. Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work or Project Site to be loaded so as to make it unsafe. C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper delivery, handling, application, storage, removal and disposal of all materials and substances brought to the Project Site. Contractor shall maintain at the Project Site material safety data sheets as required by law for the use of Owner, Subcontractors and others, regardless of who obtained the sheets. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 23 of 27 SECTION 12 - INSURANCE AND BONDS 12.1. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE A. Contractor will obtain the following insurance and provide evidence thereof as described below prior to commencement of the Work or within ten (10) Days after signing the Agreement, whichever is earlier: 1. Workers Compensation Insurance; 2. Employers Liability Insurance with limits of not less than: $1,000,000 Employers Liability Each Accident, $1,000,000 Employers Liability Disease - Each Employee, $1,000,000 Employers Liability Disease - Policy Limit. 3. Commercial General Liability Insurance – ISO Form CG 00 01 (12/07) or equivalent occurrence policy which will provide primary coverage to the additional insureds (the Owner and the Consultant, if any) in the event of any occurrence, claim, or suit with: a. Limits of the greater of Contractor’s actual coverage amounts or the following: 1) Each Occurrence $1,000,000 2) Personal and Advertising Injury $1,000,000 3) General Aggregate $2,000,000 4) Medical Expense (any one person) $5,000 5) Products – Comp/OPS Aggregate $2,000,000 b. Endorsements attached thereto including the following or their equivalent: 1) ISO Form CG 25 03 (05/09), Amendment of Limits of Insurance (Designated Project or Premises), describing the Project and specifying that the General Aggregate limits as shown above applies to the Project. 2) ISO Form CG 20 10 (07/04), Additional Insured –Owners, Lessees, or Contractors – Scheduled Person or Organization, naming the Owner and Consultant, if any, as additional insureds. 3) ISO Form CG 20 01 (04/13), Primary and Noncontributory, in favor of the Owner. 4. Automobile Liability Insurance, with: a. Limits of not less than $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit each accident; and b. Coverage applying to "Any Auto" or equivalent to all owned autos, hired autos, and non-owned autos. 5. Umbrella Liability Insurance to follow form and with coverage at least as broad as the underlying commercial general liability insurance, automobile liability insurance, and employers liability insurance policies described above. The limits of this insurance will be the greater of Contractor’s actual coverage or $5,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate. The Owner and Consultant, if any, are to be included as additional insureds under this umbrella policy. 6. Builder’s Risk Insurance Policy – ISO Form CP 00 20 (06/07) Builders Risk Coverage, ISO Form CP 10 30 (06/07) Causes of Loss – Special Form, including coverage for flood, or equivalent insurance forms, with the following: a. Limits of insurance in the amount of the Guaranteed Maximum Price. b. Coverage for materials stored at temporary storage locations and materials in transit. c. Owner and subcontractors included as additional named insureds. d. Deductible of not less than $5,000 per occurrence, which will be the responsibility of the Contractor (and will not be included in the Cost of the Work or be a reimbursable expense). e. Policy will be primary coverage to other property insurance. B. Contractor will provide evidence of such insurance to Owner as follows: 1. Deliver to Owner a Certificate of Insurance on ACORD 25 (2010/05) or equivalent: a. Listing Owner as Certificate Holder and listing Owner and Consultant as Additional Insured on general liability and any umbrella or excess liability policies. b. Attaching endorsements, as listed above. (Copies of all endorsements are to be included with the Certificate of Insurance). BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 24 of 27 c. Indicating that the insurance provider will endeavor to provide the Owner with advanced notice of cancellation or nonrenewal of the insurance coverage required herein. d. Listing insurance companies providing coverage. All companies listed must be rated “A-,” “VII” or better in the current edition of A.M. Best Company’s Key Rating Guide. e. Identifying the name, address, and telephone number of the producer. The certificate is to bear the signature of the authorized representative of the producer. 2. Deliver to Owner a Certificate of Insurance on ACORD 27, Evidence of Property Insurance, for the Builder’s Risk Insurance Policy, identifying the Project as defined in the Contract, submitted to Owner, attaching the endorsement giving evidence that the Owner and all Subcontractors are listed as named insureds on the Builder’s Risk Policy. C. Contractor will maintain, from commencement of the Work, Insurance coverage required in Section 12.1 as follows: 1. Commercial General Liability Insurance through expiration of warranty period specified in Section 13.2, Paragraph B. including completion of any warranty repairs; 2. Builders' Risk Insurance through Substantial Completion; and 3. All other insurance through final payment. D. In the event of a loss, or upon request by Owner, Contractor will provide Owner with a copy of required insurance policies above. E. Owner reserves the right to reject any insurance company, policy, endorsement, or certificate of insurance with or without cause. F. Owner may, in writing and at its sole discretion, modify the insurance requirements. G. Waiver of Subrogation: Contractor waives all rights against Owner and other additional insureds for recovery of damages to the extent these damages are covered by existing insurance, including without limitation general liability, umbrella liability, auto liability, workers compensation and employer’s liability, builder’s risk, and professional liability. To the maximum extent permitted by law, Contractor hereby waives all rights of subrogation against Owner. In addition and without limiting the foregoing, Contractor will ensure that all insurance policies required herein will be indorsed to include waivers of subrogation in favor of Owner 12.2. PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND A. Prior to commencement of the Work or within ten (10) Days after signing the Agreement, whichever is earlier, Contractor will furnish to Owner a performance bond and a labor and material payment bond each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Guaranteed Maximum Price as security for all obligations arising under the Contract Documents. Such bonds will: 1. Be written on Form AIA Document A312 (2010). 2. Be issued by a surety company or companies licensed in the state in which the Project is located and holding valid certificates of authority under applicable federal insurance law as acceptable sureties or reinsurance companies on federal bonds. 3. Have a penal sum obligation not exceeding the amount permitted by law and the authorization shown in the current revision of Circular #570 as issued by the United States Treasury Department, i.e. “Treasury List”. 4. Be accompanied by a certified copy of the power of attorney stating the authority of the attorney-in-fact executing the bonds on behalf of the surety. B. All Subcontractor performance and payment bonds, if any, shall name Contractor and Owner as Obligee. C. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety company, performance bond, or labor and material payment bond with or without cause. SECTION 13 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13.1. UNCOVERING OF WORK Contractor will notify Consultant and Owner at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of performing work which would cover up work or otherwise make it difficult to perform inspections required by the Specifications or by applicable governing authorities. Should any such work be covered without proper notification having been given to Consultant, Contractor will uncover that work for inspection and provide any necessary restoration at its own expense. Such expense will not be a Cost of the Work. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 25 of 27 13.2. CORRECTION OF WORK A. Contractor will promptly correct any portion of the Work which is rejected by Consultant or Owner, or which fails to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. Contractor will bear the cost of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspection costs, compensation for Consultant's and Owner’s services, and any other expenses made necessary thereby. Such costs shall not constitute a Cost of the Work. B. Contractor will remedy any Defects due to faulty materials, equipment, or workmanship which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents. Contractor will pay all costs of correcting faulty work, including additional Consultant's fees, attorney fees, expert fees, consultant fees, copy costs, and other expenses when incurred. Such costs shall not constitute a Cost of the Work. C. Nothing in the Contract Documents will be construed to establish a period of limitation within which Owner may enforce the obligation of Contractor to comply with the Contract Documents. The one (1) year period specified in paragraph 13.2.B. has no relationship to the time within which Owner may enforce compliance with the Contract Documents, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor's liability with respect to Contractor's obligations. 13.3. ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK A. If Owner prefers to accept any portion of the Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents, Owner may do so instead of requiring removal and correction of the nonconforming Work. In that event, the Contract Sum will be reduced by an amount agreed upon by the parties which reflects the difference in value to Owner between the Work as specified and the nonconforming Work. The Guaranteed Maximum Price will also be reduced by an amount identical to the reduction in the Contract Sum. Such adjustment may consider increased maintenance costs, early replacement costs, increased inefficiency of use, and the like and will be effective whether or not final payment has been made. Such adjustment will be reflected in a Change Order pursuant to Section 8.5. B. Usage by Owner or Consultant of mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment, or other work or materials supplied under the Contract Documents prior to written acceptance by Owner, will not constitute Owner's acceptance. SECTION 14 - RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 14.1. PROCEDURE In the event there is any dispute arising under this Agreement which is not resolved by agreement between the parties, either party may give submit the dispute with all documentation upon which it relies to Owner’s University Resources Vice President, 525 South Center Street, Rexburg, Idaho, 83460, who will convene a dispute resolution conference within thirty (30) Days after receipt of such submission. The parties agree to participate in such dispute resolution conference in good faith with a goal toward resolving their dispute. The dispute resolution conference will constitute settlement negotiations and any settlement proposal made pursuant to the conference will not be admissible as evidence of liability. In the event that the parties do not resolve their dispute pursuant to the dispute resolution conference, either party may commence legal action to resolve the dispute. Any such action must be commenced within six (6) months from the first Day of the dispute resolution conference or be time barred. Submission of the dispute to the University Resources Vice President as outlined above and good faith participation in the dispute resolution conference are conditions precedent to the right to commence legal action to resolve any dispute. In the event that either party commences legal action to adjudicate any dispute without first submitting the dispute to the University Resources Vice President and participating in the dispute resolution conference, the other party will be entitled to obtain an order dismissing the litigation without prejudice and awarding such other party any costs and attorney fees incurred by that party in obtaining the dismissal, including without limitation copy costs, travel costs and expert and consultant fees and expenses. 14.2. CONTRACTOR TO PROCEED WITH DILIGENCE Pending final resolution of a dispute hereunder, Contractor will proceed diligently with the performance of its obligations under this Agreement. SECTION 15 - TERMINATION 15.1. TERMINATION BY CONTRACTOR In the event Owner materially breaches any term of the Contract Documents, Contractor will promptly give Written Notice of the breach to Owner. If Owner fails to cure the breach within ten (10) Days of the Written Notice, Contractor may terminate the Agreement by giving Written Notice to Owner and recover from Owner, subject to the Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Cost of the Work through the date of termination plus the percentage of the Contractor’s Fee thereon, less any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled to unearned profits or any other compensation or damages as a result of the termination and hereby waives any claim therefor. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials which Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 26 of 27 under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. 15.2. TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE Should Contractor fail to provide Owner with the bonds and certificates of insurance required by Section 12 within the time specified therein, make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, fail to apply enough properly skilled workmen or specified materials to properly prosecute the Work in accordance with Contractor’s schedule, or otherwise materially breach any provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, without any prejudice to any other right or remedy, give Contractor Written Notice thereof. If Contractor fails to cure its default within ten (10) days, Owner may terminate the Agreement by giving Written Notice to Contractor. In such case, Owner may, in Owner’s sole discretion, take legal assignment of subcontracts and other contractual rights of Contractor and/or take possession of the premises and all materials, tools, equipment, and appliances thereon, and finish the Work by whatever method Owner deems expedient. Contractor will not be entitled to receive any further payment of outstanding Costs of the Work or Contractor’s Fee thereon (less offsets and subject to the Guaranteed Maximum Price) until the Work is finished. Contractor will also be liable to Owner for reimbursement of all additional administrative, architectural, consultant, and legal expenses (including without limitation attorney fees, expert fees, copy costs, and other expenses) incurred by the Owner relative to the Owner’s termination for cause. In addition, should Owner’s expense to complete the Work exceed the Guaranteed Maximum Price, Contractor will be liable to pay the difference to Owner. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials which Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. 15.3. TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE Notwithstanding any other provision contained in the Contract Documents, Owner may, without cause and in its absolute discretion, terminate the Agreement at any time. In the event of such termination, Contractor will be entitled to recover from Owner, subject to the Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Cost of the Work through the date of termination plus the percentage of the Contractor’s Fee thereon, less any offsets. Contractor will not be entitled to unearned profits or any other compensation as a result of the termination and hereby waives any claim therefor. Contractor will provide to Owner all warranty, as built, inspection, and other close out documents as well as materials which Contractor has in its possession or control at the time of termination. Owner may, in Owner’s sole discretion, take legal assignment of subcontracts and other contractual rights of Contractor. Without limitation, Contractor’s indemnities and obligations under section 3.14 as well as all warranties in the specifications relative to Work provided through the date of termination survive a termination hereunder. SECTION 16 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 16.1. GOVERNING LAW The parties acknowledge that the Contract Documents have substantial connections to the State of Idaho. The Contract Documents will be deemed to have been made, executed, and delivered in Rexburg, Idaho. To the maximum extent permitted by law, (i) the Contract Documents and all matters related to their creation and performance will be governed by and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of Idaho, excluding conflicts of law rules; and (ii) all disputes arising from or related to the Contract Documents will be decided only in a state or federal court located in or near Rexburg, Idaho and not in any other court or state. Toward that end, the parties hereby consent to the jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in Idaho and waive any other venue to which they might be entitled by virtue of domicile, habitual residence, place of business, or otherwise. 16.2. NO WAIVER No action or failure to act by Owner, Consultant, or Contractor will constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor will such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 16.3. RULE OF CONSTRUCTION Owner and Contractor agree that the Contract Documents will be deemed to have been drafted by both Owner and Contractor and will not be construed against either Owner or Contractor because of authorship. 16.4. SEVERABILITY Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, the invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not affect the validity and enforceability of any other provision of the Contract Documents. 16.5. ENFORCEMENT In the event either party commences legal action to enforce or rescind any term of the Contract Documents, the prevailing party will be entitled to recover its attorney fees and costs, including without limitation all copy costs and expert and consultant fees and expenses, incurred in that action and on all appeals, from the other party. BYU Idaho General Conditions For A Cost Plus A Fee With GMP Project 11/19 Page 27 of 27 16.6. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Owner and Consultant have the right to have tests made when they deem it necessary. Tests conducted by Owner or Consultant will be paid for by Owner. Should a test reveal a failure of the Work to meet Contract Document requirements, the cost of the test as well as subsequent tests related to the failure necessary to determine compliance with the Contract Documents will be paid for by Owner, with the cost thereof deducted from the Contractor’s Fee by Modification. B. Tests will be made in accordance with recognized standards by a competent, independent testing laboratory. Materials found defective or not in conformity with Contract Document requirements will be promptly replaced or repaired at the expense of Contractor. A. Owner and Consultant have the right to obtain samples of materials to be used in the Work and to test samples for determining whether they meet Contract Document requirements. Samples required for testing will be furnished by Contractor and selected as directed by Consultant. Samples may be required from the sample's source, point of manufacture, point of delivery, or point of installation at Consultant's discretion. Samples not required as a Submittal in the Specifications will be paid for by Owner. Should tests reveal a failure of the Sample to meet the Contract Document requirements, Contractor will provide other Samples which comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents at no cost to Owner. 16.7. TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE OF ANY MECHANICAL DEVICES Temporary or trial usage by the Owner of mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, elevators, equipment or other work or materials supplied under this Contract shall not be construed as evidence of the Owner's acceptance. 16.8. OWNERSHIP OF ARTIFACTS All historical artifacts found on the Project Site, including but not limited to construction materials, building elements, jewelry, memorabilia, coins or money, paper or documents, are and will be treated by the parties as being the property of Owner. All such artifacts discovered by Contractor or Subcontractors on the Project Site will be promptly surrendered to Owner. END OF DOCUMENT 4818-4868-7749, v. 3 BYU Idaho Agreement between Owner and Contractor for a Cost Plus a Fee with GMP Project Page 1 of 3 AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR FOR A COST PLUS A FEE WITH GMP PROJECT Brigham Young University-Idaho (“Owner”) and (“Contractor”) hereby enter into this Agreement between Owner and Contractor for a Cost Plus a Fee with GMP Project (“Agreement”) and agree as follows: 1. Project. Project Name: 2020 ROM HVAC Fan Wall (“Project”) Project Address: (“Project Site”) 2. Scope of the Work. Contractor will furnish all labor, materials, equipment, construction, and services necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Documents. a. The Contract Documents consist of: 1) This Agreement; 2) The General Conditions for a Cost Plus a Fee with GMP Project (“General Conditions”) contained in the Project Manual titled and prepared by (“Consultant”); 3) The Specifications contained in the above-referenced Project Manual; 4) The Drawings prepared by Consultant entitled . 5) Addenda Numbered: ; and dated 6) All Modifications to the Contract Documents. b. The Contract Documents are incorporated into this Agreement by reference as if fully set forth herein. c. The definitions set forth in the General Conditions will apply to the Contract Documents. d. The Contract Documents contain the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersede all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. e. Modifications or other amendments to the Contract Documents must be in writing and as provided in the General Conditions. 4. Contract Sum. a. Owner will pay Contractor for performance of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents the Contract Sum consisting of: 1) the Cost of the Work as defined in the General Conditions; plus 2) the Contractor’s Fee which will be % of the final Cost of the Work (less that portion of the Cost of the Work pertaining to Contractor’s premiums for insurance and bonds and amounts paid for permits, licenses and inspections), as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents. b. Notwithstanding Section 5.a above or any other provision of the Contract Documents, Contractor guarantees that the Contract Sum will not exceed the Guaranteed Maximum Price which will be $ , as BYU Idaho Agreement between Owner and Contractor for a Cost Plus a Fee with GMP Project Page 2 of 3 adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor will not be entitled under any condition to receive from Owner any amount in excess of the Guaranteed Maximum Price. 5. Time of Commencement and Substantial Completion. a. Contractor will not commence the Work until after . b. Contractor will achieve Substantial Completion and have the Work ready for Owner’s inspection no later than the . c. Time is of the essence of the Contract Documents. 6. Delay in Completion of the Work. a. The amount of liquidated damages to be paid to the Owner for delays in Substantial Completion under General Conditions Section 9.4, Paragraph A is $600 per day. b. The amount of liquidated damages to be paid to the Owner for delays in completing work itemized on the Substantial Completion Certificate under General Conditions Section 9.4., Paragraph B is $600 per day. 7. Independent Contractor Relationship. Contractor is an independent contractor and is not the agent or employee of Owner. 8. Assignment. Contractor will not assign any right or obligation hereunder without the prior written consent of Owner, which consent may be granted or withheld in Owner's absolute discretion. Contractor will not assign moneys due or to become due to Contractor hereunder, nor will Contractor pledge the credit of Owner or bind Owner to any third party. 9. Work Restrictions. Contractor will ensure that it and its agents, employees and sub-contractors: a. Do not use or consume alcohol or cannabis, or illegally use drugs, upon the Project Site or enter upon the Project Site or perform any Work while under their influence; b. Do not smoke or vape anything on the Project Site; Do not use tobacco in any form on the Project Site; c. Do not perform Work on the Project Site on Sundays; d. Refrain from using profanity or being discourteous or uncivil to others on the Project Site or while performing services under this Agreement; e. Do not view or allow pornographic or other indecent materials on the Project Site; f. Do not play obnoxious and/or loud music on the Project Site; Do not play any music within existing facilities; g. Refrain from wearing immodest, offensive or obnoxious clothing while on the Project Site; and h. Do not bring weapons onto the Project Site. 10. Notice. The parties hereby designate the following mailing addresses and email addresses to be used for sending Written Notice to the other party: To Owner: Attention: 525 South Center Street Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205 208-496-2651 AND with a duplicate copy submitted through Owner’s Project Management System. To Contractor: Attention: , BYU Idaho Agreement between Owner and Contractor for a Cost Plus a Fee with GMP Project Page 3 of 3 11. Effective Date. The effective date of this Agreement is the date indicated by the Owner’s signature. Client: Contractor: Brigham Young University-Idaho By: President – BYU-Idaho Date Authorized Representative Print Name: University Resources Vice President – BYU-Idaho Date Title: University Operations Managing Director – BYU-Idaho Effective Date Date: Fed. I.D. : Contractor License No.: v. 3 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 1 SECTION 23 0000 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. Sections of other Divisions which relate to mechanical work apply to the work of this section. See various Sections on sitework, underfloor work, structural work, finish materials, etc. B. Related Sections: Refer to “Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment” Section in Division 23 for basic electrical requirements for all mechanical equipment. Special and specific electrical requirements are specified within each respective equipment specification section. 1.2 SUMMARY: This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 23. It expands and supplements the requirements of Division 01. This Division does not define, nor is it limited by, trade jurisdictions. All work described herein is a part of the General Contract and is required of the Contractor regardless. 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT: The mechanical work described in these mechanical specifications is for a project located at Brigham Young University Idaho in Rexburg, Idaho. Design weather conditions are: 89o db, 61o wb, and winter -30oF. Altitude readings, unless otherwise noted, are for an elevation of 4,950 feet above sea level. Make adjustment to manufacturer's performance data as needed. 1.4 CODES AND PERMITS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION: A. The mechanical work shall be performed in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of the various codes, ordinances and adoptions pertaining to the project location in effect on the date of invitation for bids. All materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations and ordinances shall be provided. Where the drawings and/or specifications indicate materials or construction in excess of code requirements, the drawings and/or specifications shall govern. B. The Contractor shall hold and save the Owner and Architect/Engineer free and harmless from liability of any nature or kind arising from his failure to comply with codes and ordinances. C. Permits necessary for the prosecution of the work under this contract shall be secured and paid for by the contractor(s) include connection fees related to utility hookups. Contractor shall include all sewer connection fees and shall verify current rate with Rexburg City prior to bid. D. REFERENCE STANDARDS: American Welding Society International Mechanical Code/State Code International Building Code/State Code International Energy Conservation Code 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 2 SMACNA Duct Design Standards Local/State Plumbing Code Locally enforced NFPA Codes Local Power Utility Regulations ASME Codes for Pressure Vessels and Piping ANSI B31.1 Piping E. Final inspection by the Architect/Engineer will not be made nor Certificate of Substantial Completion issued until certificates of acceptability from the Authorities having jurisdiction are delivered. 1.5 DEFINITION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The mechanical drawings at reduced scale show the general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc., and shall be followed as closely as the actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit. The architectural and structural drawings shall be considered as part of the work insofar as these drawings furnish the Contractor with information relating to design and construction of the building. Architectural drawings shall take precedence over mechanical drawings. Request clarification and participate in resolution in the event of conflict. Because of the small scale of the mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be required. Investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and arrange the work accordingly, providing such extensions, fittings, valves and accessories to meet the conditions as may be required. Some small scale work is not shown such as control conduit and piping, incidental piping, specialties. Provide as directed by note or specification. Examine the actual construction site prior to bidding and obtain an understanding of the conditions under which the work will be performed. No allowances will be made for failure to make such examination. During construction, verify the dimensions governing the mechanical work at the building. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed because of differences between actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings. Examine adjoining work on which mechanical work is dependent for perfect efficiency, and report any work of other trades which must be corrected. No waiver of responsibility for defective work shall be claimed nor allowed due to failure to report unfavorable conditions affecting the mechanical work. 1.6 ROUGH-IN: A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 02 through 35 for rough-in requirements. 1.7 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS: A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with existing building components. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 3 D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate installation of mechanical equipment and materials. G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. H. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. I. Coordinate the installation of heating water piping above ceiling, extending from the main HW lines to the Fan Room, with suspension systems, light fixtures, existing structures and other installations. J. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with existing overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. K. Where mechanical work penetrates other trade work such as gypboard walls, etc., penetration shall be neatly cut and walls shall be filled and patched. L. All materials exposed within a return air plenum shall either be noncombustible or have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a max smoke developed index of 50. 1.8 ACCESSIBILITY: A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location. C. Establish required clearance to all installation features involving operation and maintenance. Respect manufacturer’s recommendations for access and clearance. D. Access Doors - General: All items of mechanical equipment which may require adjustment, maintenance, replacement or which control a system function shall be made readily accessible to personnel operating the building. 1. Provide access doors in all ductwork or plenums as required to maintain fire dampers, equipment, controls or other elements of the system. Doors shall conform to SMACNA standards unless otherwise detailed or specified. Refer to Section 23 33 00 for sizes. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 4 1.9 CHANGE ORDERS: See General Conditions. 1.10 ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION/SUBSTITUTION: These documents outline a way in which the Owner may be delivered a functional and reliable facility. Drawings and specifications describe reasonable engineering practice for the Contractor to follow. Coordination between trades may result in periodic needs to adjust the installation from that indicated, but in no case shall the intended function be compromised. The Contractor may perceive some work methods which differ from those specified which could save time and effort. These may be presented to the Architect with a breakdown of possible cost savings for review. Implement only with authorization. Materials substitutions will generally be covered in a review process prior to bidding. After bidding, substitutions shall be proposed only on the basis of definitive cost accounting and implemented only with authorization. 1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. Lay out the project where new work is involved ahead of time, providing sleeves and blockouts, and have work specifically formed, poured and framed to accommodate mechanical installations. Cut and patch only as needed. B. Refer to the Division 01 Section: CUTTING AND PATCHING for general requirements for cutting and patching. C. Refer to Division 26 Section: BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS for requirements for cutting and patching electrical equipment, components, and materials. D. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other and any work damaged as a result of mechanical installations. F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations. G. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work; 2. Remove and replace defective Work; 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents; 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing: 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. H. Upon written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 5 I. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of mechanical piping and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. J. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. K. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 1.12 SUBMITTALS: Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only from the Contractor to the Architect. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Architect/Engineer will not be processed. Document each transmittal and sign and stamp the submittal indicating that it has been reviewed and is in compliance with the criteria of the project, any exceptions being clearly noted. A. Shop Drawings: As soon as possible after the contract is awarded, submit to the Architect/Engineer, electronic copies of the descriptive literature covering all equipment and materials to be used in the installation of mechanical systems for this project. Written confirmation of acceptable review by the Owner's Representative shall be obtained before ordering, purchasing, acquiring or installing any such equipment or materials for the project. Prepare the submittals in an orderly manner after the order of this specification. Submitted literature shall clearly indicate performance, quality, utility requirements, dimensions of size, connection points and other information pertinent to effective review. Equipment must fit into the available space with allowance for operation, maintenance, etc. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for space and utility requirements for equipment installed. Factory-wired equipment shall include shop drawings of all internal wiring to be furnished with unit. Review of the Architect/Engineer is for general conformance of the submitted equipment of the project specification; in no way does such approval relieve Contractor of his obligation to furnish equipment and materials that comply in detail to the specification, nor does it relieve the Contractor of his obligation to determine actual field dimensions and conditions which may affect his work. B. Record Drawings: During the course of construction, maintain a set of drawings, specifications, change orders, shop drawings, addenda, etc., for reference and upon which all deviations from the original layout are recorded. Turn these marked-up documents over to the Architect/Engineer at the conclusion of the work so that the original tracings can be revised. If the Contractor fails to mark up the prints, reimburse the Architect/Engineer for time required to do so. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND TRAINING: A. Refer to Section 019113. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 6 1.14 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY: The following guarantee is a part of this specification and is binding on the part of the Contractor and his assigns: "Contractor guarantees that this installation is in accordance with the terms of the Contract and is free from mechanical defects. He agrees to replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, any part of this installation which may fail or be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance. See also the General Conditions of these specifications. Failed equipment in the repair or replacement shall be guaranteed for one full year from the date of recommission." Compile and assemble the warranties required by Division 23 into a separated set of vinyl covered, insert sheets, tabulated and indexed for each reference, included in the O & M Manual. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. Mechanical systems and equipment shall not be considered for substantial completion and initiation of warranty until they have performed in service continuously without malfunction for at least thirty (30) working days. 1.15 TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS: Make all tests required by code or specification in the presence of a representative of the Owner, with tests recorded and certified by the Contractor and Representative. Involve local authorities where required. 1.16 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES: Refer to General Conditions. See Paragraph 1.4. 1.17 CEILING SPACE COORDINATION: Carefully coordinate routing of heating water piping in existing corridor ceiling cavity space in order to avoid conflict with existing plumbing waste lines; supply, return and exhaust ductwork; domestic hot and cold water; fire protection; control conduit, lighting, electrical conduits, and structure, etc. All spaces above any and all ceilings shall be defined and considered as return air plenum space. 1.18 MECHANICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS: For the fan room, prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings showing major elements, components and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components (structure, fire sprinkler, electrical, etc.). Prepare drawings to an accurate scale of 1/4" - 1-0" or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and materials, including clearances for installing and maintaining equipment, servicing and maintaining equipment, valve stem movement, and similar requirements. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. Prepare floor plans, elevations, sections and details to conclusively coordinate and integrate all installations. Indicate locations where space is limited, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: A. Fan rooms: 1. Customized Air Handling Unit. 2. Supply and relief air plenums, etc. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 7 3. Cooling coils, heating coils, filters, etc. 4. Relief Fans. 5. Electrical installations. 6. Related structure. B. Work in pipe spaces, chases, etc. C. Roof penetrations. D. Installations in mechanical riser shafts, at typical sections and crucial offsets and junctures. E. Pipe expansion loops. F. Numbered valve location diagrams. G. Use drawings to coordinate all affected trades. Do not work without coordinated drawings. 1.19 SCHEDULING/METHODS OF PROCEDURE: Where interruptions of service are needed to effect work of this contract, outline the work, coordinate with other trades, determine the Owners acceptable downtime and prepare a time based schedule to accomplish the work. Give notice of a necessary utility interruption (or shutdown) to any existing system to the owner’s construction coordinator not less than 72 hours prior to the proposed shutdown. This will then be coordinated with the Campus Utility Services Department and the campus areas involved for approval to go ahead with the shutdown or re-schedule. Set up for evening, nighttime or weekend hours as necessary to accomplish the work with minimum disruption. PART II - GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. All equipment and materials shall be new, and shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment, and shall be the manufacturer's latest design. Specific equipment shown in schedules on drawings and specified herein is to be the basis for the Contractor's bid. Provisions for substitute equipment are outlined in the General Conditions. All materials shall be produced by manufacturing plants located in the United States of America. B. Furnish and install all major items of equipment specified in the equipment schedules on the drawings complete with all accessories normally supplied with catalog items listed, and all other accessories necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation. 2.2 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Close pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs to prevent lodgement of dirt or trash during the course of installation. Cover equipment tightly and protect against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. At the completion of the work, clean equipment and materials and polish thoroughly and deliver in a factory dock condition for the Owner's acceptance. Make damage and defects developing before acceptance of the work good at 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 8 Contractor's expense. B. Do not make temporary use of project equipment, new or existing, during construction without the written consent of the owner. SYSTEMS SHALL NOT BE USED FOR TEMPORARY HEAT. 2.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKMEN: A. All mechanics shall be capable journeymen, skilled in the work assigned to them. Apprentices may be used with appropriate direction. B. Employ no unskilled persons in the work which he is given to do; execute all work in a skillful and workmanlike manner. All persons employed upon this work shall be competent, faithful, orderly and satisfactory to the Owner. Should the Owner's Representative deem anyone employed on the work incompetent or unfit for his duties, and so certify, Contractor shall dismiss him and he shall not be again employed upon the work without permission of the Owner's Representative. C. All welders involved in welding of pressure piping systems shall be certified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Written verification of successful test completion shall be submitted to Architect prior to initiating work. 2.4 FOREMAN: Dedicate and designate a full-time general mechanical foreman to the Owner's Representative to be consistently available on site during the life of the project for consultation. Do not replace this individual without prior approval from the Owner's Representative. 2.5 USE OF COMMON VENDORS: Regardless of subcontract delegations, coordinate purchasing between trades so that equipment and materials of similar nature come from a single vendor. Valves, speed drives, etc., the same. Do not burden the Owner with multiple brands of similar equipment unless so directed. 2.6 ROOF/WALL/FLOOR PENETRATIONS - FLASHINGS: A. Install sleeves through the wall caulked and sealed. Use Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe for all pipe sleeves. B. Let pipe sleeves allow for movement of the pipe due to expansion and contraction, yet to include seismic restraint. C. Refer to Section “FIRE STOPPING” for requirements. D. Flashings: 1. Make all ductwork penetrating the roof watertight with flashings, counterflashing and sealant. Provide curbs for all such openings. 2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (GENERAL): A. Provide hangers and/or supports for all equipment, piping and ductwork. Primary information is contained in these specifications and on the drawings. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 9 B. Provide hangers and supports to correlate with seismic restraint and vibration isolation. 2.8 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: Install all equipment in strict accordance with directions and recommendations furnished by the manufacturer. Where such directions are in conflict with the plans and specifications, report such conflicts to the Architect who shall direct adjustments as deemed necessary and desirable. 2.9 LUBRICATION: Lubricate equipment at startup. Then, provide all lubricants for the operation of all equipment until acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor is held responsible for all damage to equipment and bearings while the equipment is being operated by him consequent to pre-acceptance operation. 2.10 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL: A. In general, motor starters, related motor starter equipment and power wiring indicated on the electrical drawings and control diagrams are to be furnished and installed under Division 26 of this Specification. Items of electrical control equipment specifically mentioned to be furnished by the Division 23 either in these specifications or on the electrical or mechanical drawings, shall be furnished and mounted by this Contractor and shall be connected under and as required by this Division 23 and Division 26 of these specifications. B. Refer to the control equipment and wiring shown on the diagrams. Any changes or additions required by specific equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the contractor. C. Division must be fully coordinated with Division 26 to ensure that all required components of the work are included and fully understood. No additional cost shall accrue to the Owner as a result of lack of coordination. D. Where the detailed electrical work is not shown on the electrical drawings, the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, install and wire or have prewired all specified and necessary controls for air handling equipment specified for this project. The objective of this paragraph is to make sure a complete operating system is obtained at no additional cost to the Owner for field wiring required related to the equipment. 2.11 FLUSHING AND DRAINING OF SYSTEMS/CLEANING OF PIPING AND DUCTS: Fill, clean and flush and sterilize where appropriate, all water piping systems with water and drain these systems before they are placed in operation. Flushings shall consist of not less than six (6) short, intermittent flushes of five (5) to ten (10) minutes duration. Sample and test each flush for cleanliness. Blow out all other piping systems with compressed air or nitrogen to remove foreign materials that may have been left or deposited in the piping system during its erection. Duct systems shall have all debris removed and fans shall be run to blow out all dust and foreign matter before grilles, outlets or mixing boxes are installed and connected. Damp wipe all ductwork on installation, cap open ducts, cover fan inlets, vacuum fan plenums and related installation before starting fans. Run fans only with filters in place. 2.12 JOBSITE CLEANUP: A. Keep site clean during progress of work. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 10 B. At the conclusion of work, clean all installation thoroughly. 1. Leave equipment in a factory dock condition. Correct any damage and touch up or repaint if necessary. 2. Remove all debris from site. END OF SECTION 230000 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 23 0100 - 1 SECTION 23 0100 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Furnish two sets of bound and four discs of the operation and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall contain descriptive drawings and data which identify equipment installed at the project and detail the procedures and parts required to maintain and repair the equipment. Copies of approved submittals shall be included for all equipment. 1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: A. General: 1. The "Operating and Maintenance Manual" is a bound compilation of drawings and data that the owner requires for each building or project. These manuals and discs, complete with drawings and data, shall be furnished to BYU Idaho Physical Plant. 2. The mechanical contractor has overall responsibility to obtain the necessary data and compile the data as set forth in this specification, including items or equipment purchased by the University and delivered to the contractor for installation. 3. The number of binders (or "volumes") required will depend on the amount of information to be catalogued. Total "sets" see paragraph 1.2A. 4. Make all information legible and sufficiently marked to indicate the exact size, model, type, etc., of equipment furnished and installed. B. Purpose: The Operating and Maintenance Manual is prepared to provide a ready reference to all important pieces of mechanical and electrical equipment installed on the project. It is also to provide the necessary operating and maintenance data for use by service personnel. It is also to provide information required for checking equipment performance or for planning of plant expansion or redesign. PART II - MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 PAGE SIZE: All pages shall be standard 8-1/2 x 11 inches size or approximate multiples (preferably 16 x 11 inches) folded to 8-1/2 x 11 inch. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 23 0100 - 2 2.2 DRAWINGS: All drawings larger than 8-1/2" x 11" shall be folded and inserted in individual 8- 1/2" x 11" manilla pockets, which shall have standard three-ring side punching for insertion in the binders. The equipment name, drawing description and number shall be written on the face of each manilla pocket. 2.3 BINDERS: Binders shall be 8-1/2 x 11 inch, 3 ring ridged type “D” with clear plastic cover and backbone for slip in title information 2" to 3" rings as required for the project. The number of binders, however, shall be based on not filling them beyond 2-1/2" thickness. A. Place the following information on 8-1/2” x 11” white paper to slip into plastic covers on front and backbone: 1. "Operation and Maintenance Manual". 2. Project Name (and volume number if more than one volume). 3. Project Number (Seven Digit University project number). 4. Building name and number. 5. “BYU Idaho”. 6. Architect's name. 7. Engineer's name. 8. General Contractor's name. 9. Mechanical Contractor's name. 10. Items 6 through 8 need not be printed on the backbone. 2.4 CONTENTS AND INDEXING: A. Manuals shall contain descriptions of the building systems in sufficient detail to adequately indicate the type of systems installed and the basic details of their operation. B. All purchased equipment data shall be used to designate the sections. Within each section additional indexing of component parts may be required. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall contain to the fullest extent all possible information pertinent to the equipment. The arrangement and type of information to be filed shall be as follows: 1. Copy of purchase order change (if any). 2. Outline drawings, special construction details, “as built” electrical wiring and control diagrams for all major and supplementary systems. 3. Manufacturer’s test or calculated performance data and certified test curves. 4. Installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, including a complete parts list and sectional drawing with parts identification numbers. Mark with model, size and plan number. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 23 0100 - 3 5. Manufacturer’s brochure marked to indicate exact equipment purchased. Brochures on component parts supplied by a manufacturer with his equipment, but not manufactured directly by him, shall also be included. 6. The serial numbers of each item of equipment installed are to be listed with the model numbers and plan symbols. 7. Include a Table of Contents. The contents shall be divided with tabbed index dividers into the following suggested parts: a. Part I Building and System Descriptions b. Part II Purchased Equipment Data c. Part III Test Reports and Valve Charts d. Part IV Start-Up and Operation e. Part V Preventative Maintenance Recommendations 8. A copy of the approved submittals for each piece of equipment. 9. A copy of all testing, adjusting and balancing reports. 10. Wiring diagrams, marked with model and size and plan symbol. 11. The index shall contain the name and address of the manufacturer and, if different, where replacement and repair parts may be obtained. END OF SECTION 230100 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 1 SECTION 23 0505 - MECHANICAL FIRESTOPPING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: This section includes firestopping for the following: A. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor construction including openings containing wires/cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. B. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions including openings containing wires/cables, pipes, ducts, control conduits, and other penetrating items. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases. B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the constructions penetrated. C. T-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where indicated and where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T-rated assemblies are required where the following conditions exist: 1. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities. 2. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 3. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4-inch diameter nominal pipe or 16 square inch in overall cross-sectional area. D. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. E. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and General Conditions Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 2 local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to building occupants. C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. D. Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following requirements and those specified under the “System Performance Requirements” article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of water is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements. a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their “Fire Resistance Directory,” by Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency. B. Information on drawings referring to specific design designations of through-penetration firestop systems is intended to establish requirements for performance based on conditions that are expected to exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated systems require the Architect’s prior approval. Submit documentation showing that the performance of proposed substitutions equals or exceeds that of the systems they would replace and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience installer who has completed firestopping that is similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for the project and that has performed successfully. D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer. E. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, “Polarized Light Microscopy.” F. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 3 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver firestopping products to project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers’ labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency’s classification marking applicable to project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturer’s instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation. 1.8 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL: A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with “System Performance Requirements” article in Part 1. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include but are not limited to the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following: a. Semi-refractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation. b. Ceramic fiber. c. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. d. Fire-rated formboard. e. Joint fillers for joint sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this section that comply with system performance and other requirements. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 4 1.9 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS: A. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation. B. Intumescent Putty: Non-hardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. C. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one side. D. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant: Solvent-release-curing, single-component, synthetic-polymer-based sealant. E. Intumescent Metal-Faced Sheets: Single-component, intumescent sheet with 28-gauge steel bonded to one side. F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Intumescent Latex Sealant: a. Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. 2. Intumescent Putty: a. Fire Barrier Moldable Putty, 3M Fire Protection Products. 3. Intumescent Wrap Strips: a. Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip, 3M Fire Protection Products. 4. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealants: a. Fire Barrier CP 25N/S Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Fire Barrier CP 25S/L Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. 5. Intumescent Metal-Faced Sheets: a. 3M Fire Barrier Composite Sheet CS195, 3M Fire Protection Products. 1.10 EXAMINATION: A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.11 PREPARATION: A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO FIRESTOPPING 23 0505 - 5 B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer’s recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 1.12 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS: A. General: Comply with the “System Performance Requirements” article in Part 1 and the through-penetration firestop manufacturer’s installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 1.13 CLEANING: A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur. B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 230505 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513-1 SECTION 23 0513 - MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Related Sections: Separate electrical components and materials required for field installation and electrical connections are specified in Division 26. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This section specifies the basic requirements for motors and drives furnished by this Division and for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. Package components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and disconnect switches, etc. B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical equipment are noted within these documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Provide electrical components and materials which are UL labeled. B. Provide variable speed drives which conform to the latest standard of the following: 1. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 2. NEC - National Electrical Code. 3. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association. 4. Provide complete packaged unit(s) which are listed and carry the label of at least one of the following: a. UL - Underwriters Laboratory b. ETL - ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc. c. CSA - Canadian Standards Association 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit complete product and application information for variable speed drives as follows: 1. Provide multiple sets of drawings of system (VFD) being supplied, in strict compliance with the specifications. Include, as a minimum: a. General arrangement of each unit showing size and incoming and outgoing conduit locations. b. Schematic diagrams and drawings. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513-2 c. Connection diagram, sufficient to install drive system. 2. Provide each unit with four owner/maintenance manuals which shall include: a. Vendor information of equipment being supplied. b. Connection information. c. Startup procedure. d. Fault reset instruction. e. Wiring diagrams (power and control). f. Parts list. g. Test results. h. Harmonic voltage distortion on line with unit off. i. Harmonic voltage distortion with unit on line. B. Submit product data for motors, belts, drives, starters, and other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the individual equipment specification sections. Verify project electrical characteristics with submittal. Confirm suitability for altitude, maintaining full nameplate rating plus service factor. Include this data in maintenance manual in accordance with Section "Operation and Maintenance Manuals". 1.5 REFERENCES: A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators. B. NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. C. NEMA Standards 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. D. NEMA Standards KS 1: Enclosed Switches. E. IEEE Standard 519: Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems. F. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). 1.6 WARRANTY: A. General: For variable frequency drives. Furnish a written warranty consisting of the following: 1. Warranty parts and labor for five years after substantial completion. PART II - .PRODUCTS 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513-3 2.1 MOTORS: A. Motor scheduled for connection to variable frequency drives shall be invertor duty rated. B. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications. 1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads. 2. Motor sizes large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range. 3. Two-speed motors with 2 separate windings for poly-phase motors. Confirm 2- speed starter requirements with Division 26. 4. Single speed motors of the permanent split capacitor type. (PSC) 5. Temperature Rating: Minimum rate for 40oC environment with maximum 90oC temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class H Insulation for altitude, Class B leads allowed). 6. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system, and not less than 5 evenly timed spaced starts per hour for manually controlled motors. 7. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors, 1.0 for TEFC motors. 8. Pump motors with an end shield with ventilation openings beneath the motor. 9. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general Purpose, continuous duty, design "B", except "C" where required for high starting torque. 10. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; T-frame, use driven equipment manufacturer's standards to suit specific application. 11. Bearings: a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals; b. Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance; c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor; d. For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted. e. Motors for use with Variable Frequency Drives shall have insulated bearings or grounded shafts. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513-4 12. Enclosure Type: a. Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation; b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants; c. Weather protected type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed. 13. Overload Protection: built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated, internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter. 14. Noise Rating: "Quiet" 15. Efficiency: "Premium Energy Efficient" motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112. Motors used with Variable Frequency Drives shall be compatible and designed for use with Variable Frequency Drives. Any “explosion proof” motor for classified areas, scheduled for use with VFD’s, shall be listed for invertor duty applications. 16. Nameplate: indicate the full identification of manufacturer. ratings, characteristics, construction, special features and similar information. 17. Acceptable Manufacturers: Baldor (Preferred), Century, General Electric, Lincoln, Marathon, U.S. Motors. 2.2 MOTOR DRIVES: A. Not Used. 2.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES: A. General: Furnish and install Variable Frequency Drives (motor speed controllers) with associated control signal components, harmonic filtering, power factor compensation and related cabinets, devices, ventilation, etc. Sizes and capacity as schedule on the drawings. Rate drives for constant torque application with variable torque application capability. Drive shall be warrantied for parts and labor for 18 months after substantial completion. Drives shall be wired for full VFD rating. 1. Verify compatibility of each VFD System being supplied with the related equipment motor. If a new motor is being supplied supply the VFD to match the new motor(s) and warranty the Drive to be compatible with that motor. 2. Furnish each system in a NEMA 1 enclosure either wall-mounted or free standing, with fan forced, filtered ventilation. 3. Furnish each system with silk screened or engraved labels on all door operator and pilot devices, attached with screws, rivets or adhesive. 4. Provide an electrical shock warning label on each system to warn personnel that a potential of electric shock exists. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513-5 5. Supply each system complete, wired with all components assembled in a single enclosure including, but not limited to the VFD units, contactors, door interlocked circuit breaker. Units requiring mounting and inter-wiring of separate bypass enclosure are not under this specification. 6. Supply a complete set of engineering drawings consisting of, as a minimum, general arrangement, power wiring diagram, control wiring diagram and schematic of VFD System components, options, and equipment and tests included to meet power quality requirements of the specification. 7. Furnish an owner's manual consisting of catalog sheets showing actual components and parts numbers. Manual shall also show test certificates, warranty and service personnel responsible for warranty. 8. Furnish factory trained VFD System installation and start-up and warranty service. Mount unit and connect to power supply, mount and wire remote devices. B. Construction: Assemble the Variable Frequency Drive units and components in a NEMA 1 enclosure. 1. Each Variable Frequency Drive inverter shall be altitude compensated and sized for the elevation at which the unit will be installed. The inverter shall operate in an ambient temperature of -10°C to 50°C and a humidity of 0 to 90 percent non-condensing. 2. Mount each Variable Frequency Drive inverter unit on a removable panel along with all other components such that, if required, the panel can be removed from the enclosure for maintenance or part replacement. 3. Mount the door with a minimum of two hinges with removable pins. Door shall be rigid and large doors shall have additional hinges and stiffening steel. 4. Paint enclosure, two coats over primer, with high grade enamel, a minimum of 50-70 microns thick. 5. The enclosure shall be force ventilated and the exhaust ports covered with louvers. All components of the system, except sensors, shall be contained in this single enclosure as an integrated package. 6. Door mounted operator devices shall be industrial, oil tight, equivalent to control center devices. 7. Control power for operator devices and customer connections shall be 120 volts. The control power transformer shall be a "Machine Tool" type and have both primary and secondary fusing. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513-6 C. Standard Features: Provide the following features as standard on all VFD units furnished. 1. Each VFD unit shall be a solid state AC to DC converter sinusoidal pulse-width modulation (PWM) type, with an altitude adjusted horsepower rating equal to or greater than the motor HP that the unit is supplying or not less than the scheduled rating, whichever is greater. 2. Electrical characteristics: a. Input Voltage 460 VAC +/- 10% (Nominal 480 Volts) b. Input Frequency 60 Hz +/- 5% 3. Motor braking torque available by means of regenerative braking. 4. An output frequency clamp such that minimum or maximum output frequency can be set at desired limits. 5. Rated overload current shall be 150% for one minute. 6. Each VFD shall have an adjustable acceleration/deceleration time setting from one second to 120 seconds. 7. Each VFD shall maintain a 95 percent or better displacement power factor over the entire speed range. 8. Each VFD shall maintain a 95 percent or better output/input efficiency over the entire speed range. 9. Each VFD shall be supported with a door interlocked input disconnect motor circuit protector. The MCP shall allow trip adjustment sufficient to start the motor across the line in the bypass mode and normally be set at a minimum setting for maximum protection in the VFD mode. The door mounted handle shall be lockable in the off position. 10. Each VFD shall be supported with the following door mounted operator controls as a minimum: a. Hand/Off/Auto Switch - keyed switch required. b. Local/Remote Switch - keyed switch required. c. Frequency Setting - through programmable controller pad. d. Frequency Indication Meter Calibrated in % Speed - through programmable controller pad. e. Power on Light f. VFD Enable Light g. VFD Fault Light h. External Fault Light (safeties interlock) 11. Each VFD shall be supplied with a minimum of the following protective features with an alarm display indication: a. Overcurrent Shut-off b. Regenerative Overvoltage c. Electronic Thermal Protector 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513-7 d. Heat Sink Overheat e. Instantaneous Power Failure f. Ground Fault 12. The following termination points on terminal strip for field connections: a. Safeties Interlock b. Remote Start/Stop Contact c. Remote VFD Fault Contacts (N.C.) d. Remote VFD/Bypass Enable Contacts (N.O.) e. Remote Electronic Signal Input 13. Auto restart initiation by means of an automatic time delayed restart after recovering from under voltage or loss of power. The inverter shall have auto restart compatibility with power provided by standby engine generator system provide all required components to ensure compatibility to operate on standby engine power. The invertor shall not automatically restart after overcurrent, overvoltage, over temperature, or any other damaging conditions but shall require a manual restart. 14. Remote input signal connection terminals (0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC = 0-100% speed or 4-20 mA = 20-100% Speed). D. Additional Configuration Features: 1. Bypass Option: Equip the inverter with a manual bypass contactor arrangement for transfer to the feeder line to operate at constant speed. The contactors shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked and supplied with an adjustable motor overload. 2. Provide a VFD isolation switch to allow maintenance on the VFD while in the bypass mode. Furnish prewired in the same enclosure, including contactors, VFD isolation switch, motor overload VFD/Bypass selector switch and Bypass ON light. 3. Digital or Analog Ammeter, through programmable key pad. 4. Digital or Analog Voltmeter, through programmable key pad. 5. Frequency Jump: Furnish a frequency jump control to avoid operating at a point of resonance with the natural frequency of the machine. 6. Provide series line reactors for harmonic distortion control as standard equipment. 7. Drive Speed Control, I/E or I/I or E/E or E/I transducers as needed. 8. Synchronous transfer to allow transfer from VFD to utility line and back to VFD unit while motor is running. 9. Computer interface option through the addition of a RS 232 data card. 10. Remote Digital/Analog Speed Meter with a 4-20 ma signal. Locate at central control console. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513-8 11. Provide each VFD with the ability to be able to communicate with the building automation system using BACNET MS/TP protocol. 12. 5% line reactor. E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers of VFD equipment shall meet the following requirements. 1. Suppliers of VFD Systems must be in the primary business of supplying Variable Frequency Drives and have a minimum of five (5) years of service in that business. 2. Vendor must have local service center with factory spare parts inventory and factory authorized service technician on call 24 hours/day. 3. VFD units supplied in response to this specification shall be labeled by UL, CSA or ETL. Note, the entire unit shall carry the label not just a component. 4. The following VFD suppliers are acceptable providing that all points of this specification are adhered to: a. ABB b. Energy Management Corporation using Mitsubishi drives. 5. VFD vendors must have prior approval from Owner before quoting equipment specified. If not listed above, vendor must apply to Owner for approval 10 days prior to bid date showing point by point compliance with this specification including sample of typical harmonic voltage distortion test report. In compliance with general requirements of the specification. F. Testing: Prior to shipping, test each unit and submit certified test report with each unit. Standard tests to include: 1. Visual inspection, consisting of checking unit enclosure, wiring, connections, fasteners, covers and locking mechanism. 2. High pot test; two (2)X rated voltage plus 1000 volts AC for 60 seconds shall be applied per UL 508 on all perifial drive system power components (circuit breakers, contactors, motor overloads, line reactors, disconnect switches, etc.) as a complete package. A copy of test results shall be included in operation manuals. 3. Motor run test. 4. Control panel devices, test all devices and lights. 5. Optional equipment, test optional equipment specified with VFD system. 6. Special tests, as required and specified. G. Installation: Field mounting pad and power connections shall be provided by contractor. 1. Vendor shall supply field start-up service by an authorized factory service representative consisting of system check-out, start-up and system run. The 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTORS, DRIVES AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0513-9 vendor shall provide warranty and authorized factory service including operator training. A written certificate of same shall be provided at start-up. Provide written certified start-up report. VFD service technicians shall be full time employees of the vendor or manufacturer, primarily engaged in VFD service work during normal business hours but on call 24 hours. Start-up by sales representative is not acceptable. 2. Startup/adjustment effort shall have at least two segments. a. Prior to Test and Balance work to place equipment in operation. b. At conclusion of Test and Balance work to adjust units to actual operating conditions. 3. The following adjustments and tests shall be performed as a minimum with certified copies included in the maintenance and operation manual. a. Verify that the input voltage is within the manufacturer's specification tolerances. b. Verify that the motor rotation is correct in all modes of operation. c. Verify all operator devices, programming and monitoring functions to be fully operational. d. Verify operation of all field signal control connections. e. Measure and record system output voltage and current at 50% and 100% speed. Tune the output voltage to correspond to motor nameplate rating at full speed. Check full load current measurements against nameplate data. f. Make all parameter adjustments to tune and optimize the VFD system to the application. Record all configuration values as part of this report. g. Conduct harmonic tests as identified in the specification. Measurements shall be recorded for each unit with the VFD system off, running at 50% speed, and running at full speed and load. END OF SECTION 230513 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT STATION 230516-1 SECTION 230516 – AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT STATION PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Furnish and install following meters as described in Contract Documents. a. Airflow Measurement Stations B. Related Sections 1. Section 23 0500 - General Mechanical Requirements 2. Section 23 3100 - General Duct Requirements PART II PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Airflow/Temperature Measurement Station (AFM-) 1. Airflow/Temperature Measurement - General. The airflow/temperature measurement station(s) indicated on the plans shall be capable of monitoring airflow and temperature rates at each measurement location. Sensors shall use thermal dispersion technology with two bead in glass", hermetically sealed thermistor probes at each measurement point. The system shall be factory tested prior to shipment and not require calibration or adjustment over the life of the equipment when installed in accordance to manufacturer's guidelines. Each sensor probe shall be provided with a UL plenum- rated connecting cable with circular terminal connectors and gold plated contacts. Connecting cable shall be a minimum of 50 feet in length for each probe. Sensor probes shall be "plug and play" design without having to be matched to a specific transmitter. All sensor calibration data shall be stored in the sensor probe. No additional devices or transducers shall be required to interface with the host controls. Sensors shall be factory-calibrated at 16 airflow rates and 3 temperatures to NIST- traceable standards for both airflow and temperature. Each sensing point shall independently measure airflow and temperature prior to averaging. Installed accuracy shall be percent of reading and demonstrated at both maximum and minimum airflow rates for each measurement location. 2. Transmitter and Electronics Enclosure The transmitter shall be microprocessor-based and capable of processing up to 16 independent sensing points per location. All connectors and interconnects shall have gold plated contacts. The transmitter shall operate on 24 VAC and be internally fused and protected. The transmitter shall have a 16-character alphanumeric LCD display for airflow, temperature, and system diagnostics. Analog output signals shall be field selectable (0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA). All inputs and outputs shall be fused, protected, and internally isolated from the 24 VAC power supply. The transmitter shall have a digital adjustment for output signal offset/gain and an adjustable digital filter for airflow output. The transmitter shall be capable of displaying I.P. units. The transmitter shall accept a user-defined area for CFM display. The transmitter shall be capable of continuously performing sensor and transmitter diagnostics and perform a full system 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT STATION 230516-2 check on power-up. A sensor detection system shall ignore any malfunctioning sensors and set a visual alarm on the LCD display. The transmitter shall be capable of indicating individual sensor airflow and temperature readings on the LCD display. The enclosure shall be aluminum alloy for indoor use and capable of operating over a temperature range of +30 F to +120 F. The electronics shall be installed inside and protected from the weather. 3. Duct & Plenum Mounted Sensor Probes Sensor probes shall be constructed of gold anodized aluminum alloy tube with 304 stainless steel mounting brackets. Probes shall be constructed as insertion, internal, or standoff mounting, depending on the installation requirements. a. Probe Performance Requirements- The sensor accuracy for airflow shall be at least +/- 2% of Reading over the sensor probe operating ranges. The installed total accuracy for airflow shall be better than 3% of Reading over the sensor probe operating ranges when installed in accordance with manufacturers' guidelines. The sensor accuracy for temperature shall be better than +/- 0.15 F over the entire operating range. b. Probe Sensor Density Area (sq.ft.) Sensors </= 1 - 2 1 to < 4 - 4 4 to < 8 - 6 8 to < 12 - 8 12 to < 16 - 12 >=16 - 16 c. Probe Operating Ranges: Airflow: 0 to 5,000 FPM Temperature: -20 F to +160 F Relative Humidity: 0 to 99% (non-condensing) 4. Approved Manufacturers and Equipment a. EBTRON Gold Series model. b. Air Monitor - Electroflow PART III EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Water Flow Measuring Devices 1. Use flow measuring devices to balance water flows. 2. Install flow measuring devices with at least 5 diameters of straight and unobstructed pipe upstream and 2 diameters downstream. B. Install airflow measuring station per manufacturer instructions. Provide required upstream and downstream duct diameters. END OF SECTION 230516 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1/24/2020 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 230519 - 1 SECTION 230519 - THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division 23 Thermometers and Pressure Gauges section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to thermometers and pressure gauges specified herein. C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of meters and gauges required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in this and other Division-23 sections. B. Meters and gauges specified in this section include the following: 1. Temperature Gauges and Fittings. a. Digital Thermometers. b. Thermometer Wells. c. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs. 2. Pressure Gauges and Fittings. a. Pressure Gauges. b. Pressure Gauge Valves. c. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of thermometers and/or pressure gauges, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Temperature and Pressure Gauge Types: Provide temperature and pressure gauges of same type by same manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of thermometer and pressure gauge. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of valve, indicating dimensions, weights, materials, and methods of assembly of components. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1/24/2020 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 230519 - 2 C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of thermometer and pressure gauge. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in Maintenance Manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIGITAL THERMOMETERS: A. General: Provide digital thermometers, designed and constructed for use in service indicated variable angle, light powered. B. Case: High impact ABS. C. Range: -40/300F. D. Display: 3/8" LLD digits. E. Accuracy: 1% of reading or 1F, whichever is greater. F. Resolution: 1/10 between -19.9/199.9F. G. Recalibration: Internal potentiometer. H. Lux Rating: 10 lux. I. Update: 10 seconds. J. Ambient Operating: -30/110F. K. Sensor: Glass passivated thermistor. L. Stem Assembly: Industrial Glass. M. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide glass thermometers of one of the following: 1. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Weksler 3. Trerice 2.2 THERMOMETER WELLS: A. General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2" extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well. B. Manufacturer: Same as thermometers. 2.3 TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTOR PLUGS: A. General: Provide temperature gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200 degrees F (93 degrees C). Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with ½" 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1/24/2020 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 230519 - 3 NPS fitting, with self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8" O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion thermometer. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping. B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide temperature gauge connector plugs of one of the following: 1. Peterson Equipment Co. 2. SISCO 3. Universal 4. Flow Design 2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES: (Liquid Filled) A. General: Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. Liquid filled. B. Type: Liquid filled for use with temperature up to 200F. C. Case and Ring: 4" type 304 stainless steel case with polished stainless steel bayonet ring. D. Dial: White aluminum with black markings. E. Window: Clear acrylic. F. Tube: Phosphor bronze. G. Socket: Brass with restrictor. H. Pointer: Black anodized aluminum, adjustable. I. Movement: Stainless steel rotary type with bushings. J. Accuracy: 1% of full scale. K. Connection: 1/4" male NPT, Provide pressure snubber, for water service. L. Range: Conform to the following; place operating pressure in mid-range. 1. Vacuum: 30" Hg - 15 psi - 30 psi, as needed. 2. Water: 0 - 100 psi - 160 psi, as needed. 3. Steam 0 - 25 psi – 160 psi as needed. M. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pressure gauges of one of the following: 1. U.S. Gauge 2. Marsh Instrument Co./Marshalltown 3. Trerice. 4. Weiss. 5. Weksler. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1/24/2020 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 230519 - 4 2.5 PRESSURE GAUGE VALVES: A. General: Provide pressure gauge valves between pressure gauges and gauge tees on piping systems. Construct gauge valve of brass bar stock with 1/4" female NPT on each end, and knurled handle brass plug or use 1/4" ball valve or Crane 88 needle valve (for steam). B. Syphon: For steam, 1/4" straight coil constructed of brass tubing with 1/4" male NPT on each end. C. Manufacturer: Same as for pressure gauges. PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: Examine areas and conditions under which meters and gauges are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAUGES: A. General: Install temperature gauges in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by observer standing on floor. B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. At outlet of each water heater at connection of new domestic hot water to existing domestic hot water. 3. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air handling units, and built-up central systems. 4. At inlet and outlet of each boiler. C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position. Fill well with oil or graphite, secure cap. D. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES: A. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge bar stock valve located on pipe at most readable position. B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At suction and discharge of each pump, single gauge, mani-folded to include inlet strainer. 2. Across of each pressure reducing valve. 3. At water service outlet at connection of domestic cold water. 4. At inlet and outlet of strainer. C. Pressure Gauge Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber for water. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1/24/2020 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES 230519 - 5 D. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap. END OF SECTION 230519 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO VALVES 23 0523-1 SECTION 23 0523 - VALVES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division 23 Valves section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to valves specified herein. C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of valves required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 23 sections. B. Types of valves specified in section include the following: 1. Drain Valves. 2. Ball Valves. 3. Butterfly Valves. 4. Miscellaneous Valves. C. Valves furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Valve Types: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer. C. Valve Identification: Provide valves with manufacturer's name (or trademark) and pressure rating clearly marked on valve body. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of valve. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of valve. Submit valve schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and valve features for each required valve. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type (exploded view) shop drawings for each type of valve, indicating dimensions, weights, materials, and methods of assembly of components. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO VALVES 23 0523-2 C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of valve. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in Maintenance Manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. MSS Compliance: Mark valves in accordance with MSS-25 "Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions". 2. ANSI Compliance: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of flanged- or welded-end valve bodies, comply with ANSI B16.10 "Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves". 3. UL and FM Compliance: Provide valves used in fire protection piping, which are UL-listed and FM approved. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES: A. General: Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. C. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 4" and smaller. Provide gear operators for quarter-turn valves 6" and larger. Provide chain-operated sheaves and chains for overhead valves 8'-0" and higher above finished floor. D. Connections: Unless otherwise noted for a particular reason, any valve 2" and larger shall have flanges. For grooved joint steel pipe in 6" and larger sizes, convert to flanged pipe, use indicated ball or butterfly valves. 2.2 GLYCOL HEATING WATER AND GLYCOL CHILLED WATER: A. Ball Valves: 1. Steel piping, 2-1/2” and smaller: 400 psig WOG @ 250ºF, bronze construction, threaded ends, bubble tight mineral filled PTFE seat at 250 psig under water, hard, stainless steel ball and stem. Operate with flow in either direction. Lever or tee handle as required. Suitable for throttling and tight shut-off. Crane, Keystone, Powell, Nibco/Scott, Milwaukee, Grinnell. All valves of the same type shall be of the same manufacturer. No other manufacturers approved. All drain valves shall be furnished with capped 3/4” threaded hose outlet connection. 2. Copper piping, 2-1/2” and smaller: 400 psig WOG @ 250ºF bronze construction, threaded or solder ends, bubble tight mineral filled. PTFE seat at 250 psig under water, hard stainless steel ball and stem. Operate with flow in either direction. Lever or tee handle as required. Suitable for tight shut-off. Watts B-6000-SS or B-6001-SS, Apollo 70-100 or 70-200, Milwaukee BA-100S or BA-150S, 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO VALVES 23 0523-3 Hammond, Belimo. No other manufacturer approved. All drain valves shall be furnished with capped 3/4” threaded hose outlet connection. B. Butterfly Valves: 1. For piping 3" and larger. Install with weld neck flanges, Norris Series R-3011-23SS-2B, double tapped lug, single-flange ductile iron or cast iron body, 316 SS disc, stainless steel shaft with extended neck for insulated pipe, EPDM seat and O-rings, indicating worm gear operator, 175 psig bubble tight pressure rating (250 where required). Demco, Keystone, Rockwell, Grinnell, Bray, ABZ, Hammond or Milwaukee. C. Balancing Cocks: 1. 2" and Smaller: 175 psig WOG, cast iron body, square head, screwed ends, wrench operated, lubricated. 2. 2-1/2" and Larger: 200 psig WOG, cast iron body, square head, flanged ends, wrench operated, lubricated. D. Balancing Valves: Circuit balancing valve with venturi and pressure taps. Do not use gate valves or butterfly valves as balancing valves. Provide schedule showing pressure drop and flow rate of each valve. Flow Set Accusetter, Armstrong, Gerand, Griswold. If improperly sized balance valves are found during the test and balance work, the improperly sized balanced valves shall be replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or project. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND SPECIALTIES: A. Air Vent Valves: Stockham B-64, 300 psi working pressure, 3/8" bronze or Crane No. 88, Watson McDonnel, Metraflex, Bell & Gossett. B. Gauge Valves: Crane #88 bronze needle valve or Trerice barstock needle valve, or ball valve. PART III - INSTALLATION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION: A. Locate all valves in locations which will allow easy operation and facilitate maintenance. B. Install valves with stems horizontal or above. C. Provide chain operators for any valves located more than 8 feet above finished floor. This means double acting lever handles for quarter turn valves, or chain wheels for multi- turn valves. Arrange valves and set up chain length for proper operation. E. Valves shall be installed with bonnets at least 45 degrees above the horizontal to ensure debris does not collect in bonnet. END OF SECTION 230523 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529-1 SECTION 23 0529 - MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division 23 Mechanical Supporting Devices section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to supports and anchors specified herein. C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of supports and anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 23 sections. B. Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following: 1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports. 2. Vertical-Piping Clamps. 3. Hanger-Rod Attachments. 4. Building Attachments and In-Beds. 5. Saddles and Shields. 6. Miscellaneous Materials. 7. Anchors. 8. Equipment Supports. C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections. D. Relate this section to Section 23 05 48 regarding seismic and vibration control. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529-2 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable building, mechanical and plumbing codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors. 2. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are UL-listed and FM approved. 3. MSS Standard Compliance: a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP-58. b. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69. c. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89. d. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. PAT II - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL-PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems. B. Adjustable Steel Clevises Hangers: MSS Type 1. (For suspension of non-insulated or insulated stationary pipe lines; 1/2" to 30".) C. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3. (For suspension of pipe requiring up to 4" of insulation and where flexibility of clamp is desirable; 3/4" to 24".) D. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. (For suspension of cold pipe lines or hot lines where little or no insulation is required; 1/2" to 24".) E. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5. (For suspension of piping when off-center closure allowing installation of hanger before erection of piping is desired; 1/2" to 4".) F. Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings: MSS Type 6. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/4" to 8".) G. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/4" to 8".) H. Adjustable Band Hangers: MSS Type 9. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529-3 pipe lines; 1/2" to 8".) I. Adjustable Swivel Rings, Band Type: MSS Type 10. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/8" to 8".) J. Split Pipe Rings: MSS Type 11. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/8" to 3".) K. Extension Split Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 12. (For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines; 3/8" to 3".) L. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24. (For support of heavy loads; 1/2" to 30".) M. Clips: MSS Type 26. (For support of uninsulated piping not subject to expansion or contraction.) N. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base- support and cast-iron floor flange. (To support pipe from floor stanchion, using floor flange to secure stanchion to floor 4" to 36".) O. Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast-iron floor flange. (To Type 36 except U-bolt provided for retaining pipe.) 2.2 VERTICAL-PIPING CLAMPS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated vertical-piping clamps complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit vertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems. B. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. (For support and steadying of pipe risers; 3/4" to 20". Also supports pipe covering or insulation.) C. Four-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42. (When longer ends are required for riser clamps.) 2.3 HANGER-ROD ATTACHMENTS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems. B. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. (For adjustment up to 6" for heavy loads.) C. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14. (For use on high temperature piping installations.) D. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. (For use with split pipe rings, MSS type 11.) E. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16. (For attaching hanger rod to various types of building attachments.) 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529-4 2.4 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS AND IN-BEDS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated building attachments for copper-piping systems. B. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18. (For upper attachment for suspending pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.) C. Top Beam C-Clamp: MSS Type 19. (Use under roof installations with bar joist construction, for attachment to top flange of structural shape.) D. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20. (For attachment to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.) E. Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21. (For attachment to center of bottom flange of beams.) F. Welded Beam Attachments: MSS Type 22. (For attachment to bottom of beams where loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.) G. C-Clamps: MS Type 23. (For attachment to structural shapes.) H. Top Beam Clamps: MSS Type 25. (For attachment to top of beams when hanger rod is required tangent to edge of flange.) I. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. (For attachment to bottom of steel I-beams.) J. Steel Beam Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 28. (Same as Type 28 with link extensions.) K. Linked Steel Clamps with Eye Nut: MSS Type 29. (Same as Type 28 with link extensions.) L. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30. (For attachment to structural steel.) M. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading: 1. Light Duty: MSS Type 31, to 570 pounds. 2. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32, to 1,500 pounds. 3. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33, to 3,000 pounds. N. Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34. (For use on sides of steel or wooden beams.) O. Plate Lugs: MSS Type 57. (For attachment to steel beams where flexibility at the beam is desired.) P. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58. (For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movements where head room is limited. Q. Refer to drawings for Unistrut inserts. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529-5 2.5 SADDLES AND SHIELDS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; see section Mechanical Insulation for void fill requirements. Use for roller supports and on all pipes 10" and larger. C. Protection Shields: See section Mechanical Insulation. D. Thermal Hanger Shields: See section Mechanical Insulation. E. Manufacturer; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thermal hanger shields of one of the following: 1. Elcen Metal Products Co. 2. Pipe Shields, Inc. 2.6 MANUFACTURERS OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the following: 1. Kin-Line, Inc. 2. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.; Div. Figgie International 3. ITT Grinnel Corp. 4. B-Line 5. Unistrut 2.7 HIGH HUMIDITY AREAS: Use cadmium plated or galvanized hangers, attachments, rods, nuts, bolts and other accessories in boiler rooms or other high humidity areas. 2.8 OUTSIDE AREAS: Use galvanized hangers, attachments, rods, nuts, bolts and other accessories for all outside areas. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36. C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. Use Embeco grout for non-shrink applications. D. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from factory built channel (Unistrut) system and use factory fasteners for channel steel shapes, selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. E. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi- steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two- section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529-6 bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments. B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection and testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination with work of this section and Architect/Engineer for purpose of reviewing material selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS: A. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. 1. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through the openings at the tops of inserts. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to rigidly support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. C. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by isolating with foam rubber covering or 30 mil insulating tape. D. Provisions for Movement: 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529-7 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. 2. Install supports within 2 feet of non-vertical flex connectors. E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded. G. Insulated Piping: Do not allow hangers to come in contact with pipe where pipe is specified to be insulated. H. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. I. Shields: Where low-compressive-strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled water piping, install galvanized steel protective shields. Install calcium silicate blocks (12" long minimum) at support points. J. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS: A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to prevent transfer for loading and stresses to connected equipment. B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards. C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit. D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe-runs, at intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. 3.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: A. Provide concrete housekeeping bases for all floor mounted equipment furnished as part of the work of Division 15. Size bases to extend a minimum of 4" beyond equipment base in any direction; and 4" above finished floor elevation. Construct of reinforced concrete, roughen floor slab beneath base for bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base. Locate anchor bolts using equipment manufacturer's templates. Chamfer top and edge corners. B. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Provide factory-fabricated tank saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands. C. Furnish roof equipment supports to Contractor for installation as part of work of Division 7; not work 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES 23 0529-8 of this section. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. B. Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment to proper level and elevations. C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 230529 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548-1 SECTION 23 0548 - MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL PART I - GENERAL: 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division 23 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to mechanical sound, vibration and seismic control specified herein. C. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: Furnish and install complete seismic restraint and vibration control systems for all work installed under Division 23. Including owner furnished contractor installed equipment. Work to be responsive to the intent of the International Building Code, latest adopted edition, for the respective seismic design Category B, importance factor of 1.5. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Engage the services of an independent seismic and vibration control subcontractor who has the technology, experience, computer capabilities and manufactured products to prepare the required computations, shop drawings and special devices to meet the minimum requirements described herein. Select from the following: 1. Amber Booth 2. Kinetics 3. Mason - West 4. Vibro-Acoustics B. The seismic and vibration control subcontractor shall visit the site during construction at a minimum of two specific periods. 1. When equipment is set in place, prior to placement of seismic restraint devices for the purposes of directing the contractor in properly locating and installing the approved devices. 2. At the completion of the project, prior to final mechanical inspection, for the purpose of verifying the correctness of the seismic restraint and vibration isolation device installation and preparing certification of the seismic vibration-isolation work. C. The seismic subcontractor shall exercise the quality control for this work and shall include, but not be limited to instructions direct to the Mechanical (Division 23) Contractor concerning: 1. Anchoring of all mechanical equipment including owner furnished and contractor installed. 2. Vibration mounting of equipment. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548-2 3. Equipment base coordination with restraint requirements. 4. Snubbing of equipment. 5. Bracing and anchoring of ductwork piping and conduit. 6. Provision for expansion and vibration of piping. 7. Concrete and/or steel pads or bases to assure proper mounting of restraints and isolators. 8. Vibration isolation of relief fans and supply air fans. D. The subcontractor shall be responsible for identifying the need for the size and location of steel sole plates and their attachment to structural steel or concrete. E. The subcontractor shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all isolation, anchors and seismic restraint materials are installed correctly and functioning properly. Certification shall be provided after all corrective work has been completed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Submittal data is required and shall consist of computations, vibration isolation selection, equipment anchors, anchor bolt sizes, supports, seismic restraints, sole plate data, restraint locations and type of restraints. B. Submittal data shall identify dimensions, load deflection data, center of gravity, standard connections, manufacturer's recommendations, behavior problems including vibrations, thermal expansion, building expansion joints, etc., associated with equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit. C. Calculations need not be submitted when restraint devices for piping, conduit and ductwork are proposed in accordance with the SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints. D. Selection of isolator anchors and restraints shall be clearly made known along with the basis for selection so that proposed systems can be reviewed. E. Calculations furnished for anchors, anchor bolts, sole plates and other support steel for restraining devices shall be signed and stamped by an engineer licensed in one of the United States. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: (Latest adopted edition) 1. International Building Code 2. NFPA bulletin 90A, 3. UL Standard 181 4. Guidelines for seismic restraint of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems. Published by the Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles, California, and the Plumbing and Piping Industry Council, Inc., Los Angeles, California. PART II - PRODUCTS 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548-3 2.1 MATERIALS - PRODUCTS: Restraint devices shall be especially designed to resist seismic forces in all directions. A. Snubbers: Restraint surfaces which engage under seismic motion shall be cushioned with a resilient elastomer neoprene (bridge bearing neoprene) to protect equipment. Restraints shall allow a maximum of 1/4" before engaging and shall not interfere in normal starting or stopping operation. Housing shall allow for visual inspection to determine clearances during system operation. Restraints shall be field adjustable and be positioned for up to 1/4" clearance both horizontally and vertically. Mountings and snubbers are to be manufactured under a Quality Assurance (QA) Program. B. Snubbers and Isolator Combination Devices: Combination unitized devices may be used where equipment isolation is required. They shall include the requirements listed for snubbers. Isolation portion shall be stable spring type with combination leveling bolt and equipment fastening device. Base plate shall have adequate means for bolting to structure. The spring assembly shall be removable and shall fit within a welded steel enclosure. C. Piping, Conduit and Duct Restraints: Restraint materials for exposed installation shall be standard fabricated flat steel, angle rod and channel members. 1. Restraint members shall be bolt connected. Cabling materials and methods shall be used only in chases or concealed ceiling spaces. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 SEISMIC RESTRAINT GUIDELINE: A. Guidelines for SMACNA seismic restraints for conduit, piping and ductwork are to serve as the basis for restraint methods. (Exception - no cabling shall be used in the restraint systems except as noted.) 3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT-PIPING AND CONDUIT: A. General: All new piping and conduit shall be protected in all planes by restraints, designed to accommodate thermal movement while at the same time restraining seismic motion. Tanks and vessels connected to piping shall be restrained in the same manner as the piping. B. Locations of the restraints shall include, but not be limited to: 1. At all drops or risers to equipment connections. 2. At all changes in direction of piping and conduit. 3. At all horizontal runs of pipe and conduit to keep it in alignment and prevent sagging with restraints not to exceed the following: a. Transverse bracing at 40'-0" O.C. maximum. b. Longitudinal bracing at 80'-0" O.C. maximum. 4. Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building seismic or expansion joints. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548-4 5. On both sides of flexible connectors. C. Exceptions: 1. Conduit under 2-1/2" size and piping under 1-1/2" size need not be additionally seismically restrained except as follows: a. Brace all piping and conduit 1-1/4" and larger in the mechanical room. 2. Seismic bracing may be omitted: a. When the top of the pipe is suspended 12" or less from the supporting structure member and the pipe or conduit is suspended by an individual hanger. b. On all piping 3/4" and smaller. 3.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT INSULATED PIPING: Where piping is designated to be insulated, the points of support shall be protected by a 360o sheet metal shield. Insert insulation shall be of the same thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. (Pipe Shields, Inc.) The sheet metal shield wrapped around the insert shall be of the following lengths and gauge thickness. PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE 1/2 - 1-1/2" 4" 20 2 - 6" 6" 20 8 - 10" 9" 16 12 - 18" 12" 16 20 and up 18" 16 3.4 SEISMIC RESTRAINT - PIPING AT FIRE-WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATION WHERE WALL IS USED AS A RESTRAINT: A. Bare Pipe: Encase pipe in minimum 24 gauge sheet metal can sized for one inch spacing between pipe and outer diameter of can. Spacing shall be packed in accordance with fire resistant/retardant materials in accordance with Section: FIRE STOPPING. B. Insulated Pipe: Encase in adjustable or fixed length cans, minimum 24 gauge, sized for maximum one inch spacing between insulation and outer diameter of can. Insulation shall consist of 360o insert sized to extend a minimum of 1" beyond wall or floor penetration and of the same thickness as the adjoining insulation. Spacing between shield and can shall be packed in accordance with Section: FIRE STOPPING. 3.5 SEISMIC RESTRAINT GROOVED PIPING: A. Where grooved piping is selected as the piping system, it must be seismically restrained as well as provide for thermal movement. B. Pipes may not be fastened to differently moving structures such as a wall or a ceiling, or a ceiling and a floor. The intent is to have the piping system move with the structure and not separate from it. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, SEISMIC CONTROL 23 0548-5 C. In general, grooved piping shall be provided with additional flexible couplings to allow extreme deflections to occur, yet restrained to prevent movement beyond the limits of the flexible connections. Linear movement shall be incorporated as a part of the flexible connections or in a swing joint arrangement. D. Groove piping systems shall be separated, analyzed and submitted from threaded or welded piping systems. 3.6 SEISMIC RESTRAINT - DUCTWORK: A. Ductwork, four feet square and larger in cross sectional area or 26" diameter and larger shall be protected in all places by restraints. Locations shall include, but not be limited to: 1. At all equipment connections. 2. At all duct turns and duct run ends (transverse bracing). 3. Transverse bracing to occur 30'-0" O.C. maximum. Rectangular ducts 61" and larger in either direction may be braced at 32'-0" O.C. 4. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at 60'-0" O.C. maximum. B. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger size frame using the overall dimensions with maximum weight for selection of restraint members. C. No bracing is required if the top of the duct is suspended 12" or less from supporting member and attached at the top of the duct as well as sides and bottom. 3.7 VIBRATION ISOLATION: A. General: Furnish and install devices to isolate moving equipment from the structure. Review isolation furnished with factory package equipment, require conformance with project criteria. B. Basic Criteria: Vibration isolation devices which have natural frequencies approximately 1/10 that of the related driving frequency. C. Equipment to Include: 1. Suspended inline relief air fans. D. Field Verify: All required devices and installation. 3.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION - DUCTWORK AND PIPING: A. Furnish and install devices to isolate all piping and ductwork from other moving equipment. Provide flex connections, spring hangers, grooved joint couplings for pipe, etc., as required. END OF SECTION 230548 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 0553-1 SECTION 23 0553 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Label all plumbing, heating, air conditioning, automatic temperature control equipment (excluding thermostats and relays), and distribution systems. Also label all electrical switches and starters for all mechanical equipment. Label all fire dampers, fire smoke dampers, smoke damper access doors. PART II - GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 EQUIPMENT, PIPE AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION: A. Equipment: 1. Use the same identification number and name as that shown on the drawings or in these specifications. Make equipment nameplates of black face formica with white engraved lettering 3/16" high or larger, attached securely. 2. Include the following information on equipment nameplates where applicable: Identification name. Identification number. Capacity specified. Actual capacity. Area or zone served. Note operating conditions, including head or static pressure, RPM, motor horsepower at design conditions, area or zone served, name of lubricant, frequency of lubrication. B. Valve Identification: 1. For all valves, regardless of size, provide brass tags at least 1-1/4" by 3" in size and 0.051 inches thick. Use engraved lettering at least 1/8" high. Identify each valve on the drawing separately, and with valve tags matching the drawing identification. 2. Provide valve tags which include the following minimum information: a. Normal Position b. Duty 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 0553-2 3. Identify tag numbers as follows: Valve Tags Duty 700 GLYCOL 4. Make a schedule of all tagged valves, include in O & M Manuals. 5. Connect valve tags to valve stems with brass chain. C. Color code all accessible duct and piping and identify with wording and arrows every 50 feet, at each riser, at each junction, at each access door, and where required to easily identify the medium transported. D. Identify duct and piping systems by: 1. Lettering color, and 2. Flow Direction Arrow. 3. Identifying lettering shall be painted or stenciled on duct or pipe. Self-adhesive or glue-on type labels are acceptable. Letters shall be 2" high for duct and for 3" or larger piping, 1" high for 1-1/4" to 2-1/2" pipe, and 1/2" high for 1" pipe and smaller. 4. Arrows to indicate direction of flow shall be painted or stenciled on the duct or pipe in the same color as the lettering. The arrow shall point away from the lettering. On duct and 3" or larger piping, the “shaft” of the arrow shall be 2" long and 1" wide. Smaller piping, 2-1/2" or less, shall have arrows with a shaft 1/2" wide and 2" long. Use a double-headed arrow if the flow can be in either direction. 5. Lettering, directional flow arrows and banding colors shall be painted or stenciled on the duct or pipe. Self-adhesive or glue on labels are acceptable. 6. Piping and duct shall be identified with the following colors: Medium in Banding Identifying Lettering Pipe or Duct Color Lettering Color Water: Glycol Chilled Water One Blue Glycol Chilled Water CHWS Black Supply Supply Glycol Chilled Water Two Blue Glycol Chilled Water CHWR Black Return Return Glycol Heating One Yellow Glycol Heating BHWS Black Water Supply Two Orange Water Supply Glycol Heating One Yellow Glycol Heating BHWR Black Water Return One Orange Water Return Cold Air Duct Cold Air Duct (Unit Served) Return Air Duct Return Air Duct (Unit Served) Relief Air Duct Relief Air Duct (Unit Served) 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 0553-3 Supply Duct Supply Duct (UnitServed) Fire, Smoke, Fire/Smoke Damper Fire, Smoke, Access Doors Fire/Smoke Damper AD – Red 2.2 PANEL IDENTIFICATION: A. Provide all panel devices on panel faces with engraved black face formica with white engraved lettering labels. B. Provide all internal panel components with engraved black face formica labels with white engraved lettering. Fasten label beneath each device. C. Numerically or alphabetically, code all panel wiring and tubing. END OF SECTION 230553 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-1 SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing new HVAC air handling system to produce design objectives, including the following: 1. Balancing airflow through the new HVAC equipment and water flows within the new air handling unit heating and cooling coils to indicate quantities according to specified tolerances. 2. Adjusting total new HVAC equipment to provide indicated quantities. 3. Measuring electrical performance of new HVAC equipment. 4. Setting quantitative performance of new HVAC equipment. 5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 6. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper. B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to design quantities. C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated. D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. F. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. G. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. H. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-2 I. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment. J. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. K. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. L. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association. M. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. N. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 90 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section. B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 120 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by- step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project. C. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. D. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms. E. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or NEBB. Balancing may only be performed by the following: 1. Barnett, Inc., Payson Utah B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's representatives and other members of the Commissioning team on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of all proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, HVAC controls installer, and other support personnel. Provide 14 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 1. Agenda Items: Include, at a minimum, the following: a. Contract Documents examination report. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-3 b. Review of the Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Plan, and proposed TAB forms. c. Proposed work schedule and Project site access requirements. d. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors, especially the Controls Contractor. e. Coordination with the Commissioning Authority and the Commissioning team. f. Coordination and distribution of a “TAB Issues and Issue Resolutions” log. g. Coordination of other documentation and communication flow. C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. 2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" or from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification." F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and/or other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities. B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. 1.8 WARRANTY (Not Applicable) 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-4 PART II - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment. 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. B. Examine air handling unit and relief fan installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been performed. C. Examine air handling unit and relief fan installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and automated volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. D. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. E. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. F. Examine existing terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. G. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed. H. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. I. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. J. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-5 K. Examine existing open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. L. Examine new equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare the system readiness reports found in section 3.23. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC or NEBB national standards and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. 3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES A. Prepare test reports for both fans. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-6 E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air intake and damper and the return- and relief-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components. 3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and relief-air systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multizone, dual- duct, induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These additional procedures are specified in other articles in this Section. B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component. a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-7 5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design to achieve design conditions. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. 6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances. D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at the air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.6 VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the fan design airflow volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set- point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. Record which airflow terminals were chosen for this purpose. B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-8 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge duct losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant- volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static- pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record the final fan performance data. C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Balance systems similar to constant-volume air systems. 2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition. 3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to design airflow and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. 4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings. 5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan, if one is installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. 6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller. 7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-9 D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set system at maximum design airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. 2. Adjust supply fan to maximum design airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum airflow. 3. Set terminal units being tested at full-airflow condition. 4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to design airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow. 6. Measure static pressure at the sensor. 7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems. 3.7 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at the end of system and moving towards the pumps. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.8 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive- displacement pumps: 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-10 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Verify with the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size. 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. 3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design. B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure- drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device. D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than design flow. E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. F. By-pass valves shall be set to equal the pressure drop of the coil, settings recorded and balancing device marked. G. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air temperature. H. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing. 3.9 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.10 PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-11 3.11 HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Maintain existing settings. 3.12 MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data. C. Report any starter thermal-protection sizing issues in the TAB issues log. 3.13 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed for more than 5000 cfm. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop. 3.14 TEMPERATURE TESTING A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system. B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. 3.15 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-12 A. Verify that controllers are calibrated. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers). E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a grounded or non-grounded power supply. J. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations. 3.16 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: + 5 to +10% 2. Positive Pressure Spaces: a. Supply Air 0 to +10% b. Exhaust Air 0 to -10% c. Negative Pressure Spaces: d. Supply Air 0 to -10% e. Exhaust Air 0 to +10% 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to -10% 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to -5% 3.17 REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare weekly reports (hand-written is acceptable) to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-13 Include a copy of the “TAB Issues and Issue Resolution” log of any deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. 3.18 FINAL REPORT A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. C. Include the National Project Performance Guarantee issued by AABC or NEBB. D. Include a detailed narrative describing any discrepancies between the design requirements and the “as balanced” conditions that exceed the allowable tolerances described in 3.19 above. Also, list the steps taken and test preformed (with supporting data) attempting to rectify the condition. E. Include the final “TAB Issues and Issue Resolutions” log. F. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves. 2. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop Drawings and Product Data. G. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report. 10. Summary of contents, including the following: a. Design versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 13. Test conditions for fans performance forms, including the following: 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-14 a. Settings for outside-, return-, and relief-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. e. VFD settings for variable-air-volume systems. f. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. g. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. H. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following: 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and relief air airflows. 2. Water and flow rates through coils 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. I. Equipment Test Reports: For all equipment tested: 1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. 2. Motor Data: Include the following: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. 3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following: (all elements of the system that were tested, including air and water flows, static pressures, inlet and outlet static pressures, inlet, outlet pressure type of coils, rows, circuits face areas, inlet, outlet wet bulb, dry bulb temperatures, duct sizes tested, inlet and outlet flows temperatures and pressures and all other pertinent data. The report to be organized per each item tested.) a. Total rate in cfm and gpm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Motor amps, volts, kW e. VFD setpoints f. Starter and Thermal Overload information g. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. h. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-15 j. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. k. Outside airflow in cfm. l. Return airflow in cfm. m. Outside-air damper position. n. Return-air damper position. o. Pitot-tube traverses. J. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following: 1. Report Data: Include the following: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.19 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 120 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions. C. Participate in verification of the TAB report, which will consist of repeating any selected measurement contained in the TAB report where required by the CxA for verification or diagnostic purposes. D. The TAB Final Report Verification shall be conducted by the CxA (and possibly other members of the Cx Team) and will include a field verification of up to 10% of the PTB’s field readings. E. The Test and Balance contractor will provide technicians and instrumentation to support the field verification. F. Instruments used for the field verification shall be the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used for the original TAB work. G. Failure of an item during the TAB field verification is defined as: 1. For all readings other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent from the reported value. 2. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 decibels. (Note: variations in background noise must be considered). H. A failure of more than 10 percent of the readings tested during the field verification shall result in the rejection of the final TAB report and require re-balancing of the system(s) in question. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING 23 0593-16 END OF SECTION 230593 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700-1 SECTION 23 0700 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections apply to work of this section. B. Division 23, Section 23 00 00 - General Mechanical Requirements applies to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of mechanical insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules as required by the current International Energy Code, and by requirements of this section. Use no asbestos in this work. Include restorations of insulations of damaged work including repair of damaged existing insulation due to new work. B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following: 1. Piping Systems Insulation: a. Fiberglass. b. Flexible Unicellular C. Refer to Division 23 section "Supports and Anchors" for protection saddles, protection shields, and thermal hanger shields. D. Refer to Division 23 section "Ductwork" for duct linings. E. Refer to Division 23 section "System Identification" for installation of identification devices for piping, ductwork, and equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700-2 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical insulation materials of one of the following (except as noted): 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Babcock and Wilcox Co., Insulating Products Div. 3. CertainTeed Corp. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. 5. Manville Products Corp. 6. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 7. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 8. Rubatex Corp. 9. Thermacell 2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS: A. PREFORMED FIBERGLASS PIPING INSULATION: ASTM C 547. (Class 1 for use to 450oF (230oC); Class 2 for use to 650oF (345oC); Class 3 for use to 1200oF (650oC). B. CELLULAR GLASS PIPING INSULATION: ASTM C 552. (Type I - flat block; Type II - pipe and tubing insulation, Class 1 - regular (uncovered), Class 2 - jacketed; Type III - special shapes; Type IV roof board. C. JACKETS FOR PIPING INSULATION: All purpose (ASJ) fire retardant jacket, ASTM C 921, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers option. D. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per manufacturer's recommendations. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700-3 E. Encase exterior fittings insulation and piping with aluminum jacket with weather-proof construction. F. Encase suction diffusers in a removable/replaceable insulating box. G. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. H. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. I. Insulation Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; complying with the following table. PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE 1/2” to 1-1/2” 4” 20 ga. 2” to 6” 6” 20 ga. 8” to 10 9” 16 ga 12” to 18” 12” 16 ga. J. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360 degrees insert of high density, 100 psi, water-proofed calcium silicate, encased in 360 degrees sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thermal hanger shields of one of the following: a. Elcen Metal Products Co. b. Pipe Shields, Inc. 2.3 PIPING SEALANT THROUGH WALLS: See also Section Mechanical Firestopping. A. Sealant shall be a two-part foamed silicone elastomer equal to Dow Corning 3-6548 Silicone RTV foam or equivalent by 3M or “Spec Seal” by STI. Sealant shall be applied at any piping of pipe or duct penetration through fire or smoke walls to prevent air from passing through the opening. B. Sealant cell structure, foamed in place, shall be U.L. classified and shall meet the smoke development and fuel contribution ratings specified. Sealant shall be stable at extreme temperatures, and shall effectively confine such hazards as fire, smoke and gases. C. Sealant required at any fire/smoke wall penetration to be according to approved detail for each specific wall assembly. Contractor shall submit detail for engineer approval. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700-4 2.4 PIPE JACKETING: A. Provide and install jacketing for all insulated pipe exposed in fan room. This in addition to standard foil on Kraft jacketing (ASJ). PVC jacketing is not allowed on outdoor piping systems. 1. Heating water, chilled water, other insulated piping. PVC sheets, 0.030" thickness. PVC formed fitting covers. Solvent welded joints and seams. (Provide for removal and expansion.) B. Color of jacketing selected by Owner. 2.5 COATING OF CHILLED WATER PIPING: After fabrication assembly and installation of black steel chilled water piping (copper and galvanized steel excluded), scrape and brush piping free of scale, dirt and loose material, and wipe clean with solvent moistened cloth. A. Using brush or roller coat entire piping surfaces with prime and finish coats of a water based vinyl acrylic system equivalent to the RustOleum “RustOCrylic” 5700 system or equivalent by SherwinWilliams. System includes red primer (5769) grey primer (5781) and black finish coat (5779). Seek a final film thickness in the 4-6 mil range. B. Allow coating to dry and harden thoroughly before applying insulations. 2.6 FIRE/SMOKE ENCASEMENT: A. Cover the bottom of each chase around return air fire damper supply duct and piping with a flame and smoke rated system to create a 1 hour continuous shaft barrier. The cover shall be equal to FireMaster “PlenumWrap”. Install per manufacturer’s requirements. The enclosure shall meet all codes. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: A. Piping insulation shall be fiberglass one-piece preformed pipe insulation, class related to temperature, with all purpose (ASJ) fire retardant jacket, additional jacketing as noted. B. Fittings and valves shall be insulated and covered with Zeston covers. C. All chilled water or any other lines upon which condensate moisture could form, shall have a vapor-proof jacket. D. Fire and smoke hazard for a complete insulation system shall not exceed: 1. Flame spread - 25 2. Fuel contribution - 50 3. Smoke development - 50 E. Hangers shall not contact pipe where pipe is specified to be insulated. 3.2 INSPECTION: 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700-5 A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.3 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION: A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on on heating piping beyond control valve, located within heated space and on unions, flanges strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. B. Cold Piping 40OF (4.4OC) to Ambient: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems: a. All HVAC chilled water piping. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2" thick for pipe sizes over 1-1/2". C. Hot Pressure Piping (to 250°F): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot low pressure HVAC piping systems (steam piping up to 100 psi, water piping up to 200 degrees F). a. HVAC hot water supply and return piping, valves and fittings. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2" thick for pipe sizes over 1-1/2". 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION: A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting, testing and acceptance of tests. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700-6 C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete the run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. H. Provide neatly beveled edge at all terminations and interruptions of insulation. I. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band. J. Saddles and Shields: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide protection saddles or thermal hanger shields with protection shields under all piping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and thermal shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. 2. Protection Saddles: See section Supports and Anchors for saddle. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. 3. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. Use on pipes 1-1/4" and smaller. Use with thermal hanger shields for pipes 1-1/2" and larger. PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE 1/2” TO 1-1/2” 4” 20 ga. 2” to 6” 6” 20 ga. 8” to 10” 9” 16 ga. 12” to 18” 12” 16 ga. 4. Thermal Hanger Shields: High density calcium silicate encased in 360 degrees sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. Use on pipes 1-1/2" to 8". 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0700-7 3.5 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR: A. Repair damaged sections of mechanical insulation damaged during this construction period. Use insulation of same thickness as existing insulation, install new jacket lapping and sealed over existing. 3.6 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT: A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during construction period to avoid damage and deterioration. END OF SECTION 230700 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 1 SECTION 23 0900 - MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of control systems work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of these control related sections. 1. See following sections for types of Control Systems included as a part of this section. a. Section 23 09 23 - Direct Digital Control Systems b. Section 23 09 33 - Electric Control Systems c. Control sequences are specified in this section under: "Sequence of Operation". B. Related Work: 1. Refer to other Division 23 sections for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies, and dampers in mechanical systems. Not work of this Section. 2. Coordinate with all Division 23 vendors of mechanical equipment, which are responsible for furnishing related control sensors and switches which are to be installed in the field by the Mechanical Controls Contractor. 3. Coordinate with Division 26 for fire alarm connections on VFD’s, etc. C. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on controls and/or unit control panels. Includes starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. 2. Interlock wiring between electrically-operated equipment units; and between equipment and field-installed control devices. a. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section. D. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division 26 sections: 1. Control wiring between field-installed equipment, controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels. 2. 120 volt service required by control systems. 3. Control Wiring: a. In concealed locations above lay-in ceilings low voltage conductor may be installed without conduit. Low voltage conductor shall be UL listed Article 725 Plenum Cable. Install the cable parallel to building walls. b. In all other building areas, i.e., electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, above “hard” ceilings, within walls, etc., all control wiring shall be 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 2 installed in conduit per National Electric Code. Installation shall be square with the walls of the buildings. c. Number and code all wiring. d. Use no wire smaller than 16 gauge, no conduit smaller than 1/2". E. Participate in "System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. MANUFACTURERS QUALIFICATIONS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electric control equipment, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. This project shall be base bid using Johnson Controls control components with an alternate price by Yamas, Controls, Inc. B. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms and workmen specializing and experienced in electric control system installations for not less than 5 years. Installing by Johnson Controls or Yamas Controls. Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing, design, and programming of specified and required control components, materials and systems. Approved contractor Johnson Controls or Yamas Controls. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, and including installation instructions and start-up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system, containing the following information: 1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices, etc. 2. System architecture/communications diagram showing each system controller and interrelated Bacnet MS/TP or Lon Works bus connections to match existing control system in place. 3. Control valve and damper schedules. 4. Floor Plans with control device/enclosure locations. 5. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control. 6. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of work that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. Note contract responsibility to provide complete system regardless of delegation. Completely interface with and show existing installation in the existing building. 7. Provide control panel wiring diagrams. 8. Provide details of faces of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 9. Include verbal written description of sequence of operation. Confirm correct function of proposed sequences. C. Samples: Submit sample of each type of proposed thermostat cover. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 3 D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Section 230100. 1.5 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION: A. After a successful acceptance demonstration, the Controls Contractor shall submit as-built drawings of the completed mechanical controls for the project to be incorporated into the overall mechanical as-built drawings for final approval. After receiving final approval, supply "6" complete 11x17 as-built drawing sets, together with AutoCad diskettes to the Owner. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: A. Submit two copies of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's catalog data and specifications on sensors, transmitters, controllers, control valves, damper actuators, gauges, indicators, terminals, and any miscellaneous components used in the system. 2. An operator's manual which will include detailed instructions for all operations of the system. 3. An operator's reference table listing the addresses of all connected input points and output points. Settings shall be shown where applicable. 4. A programmer's manual which will include all information necessary to perform programming functions. 5. A language manual which will include a detailed description of the language used and all routines used by the system. 6. Flow charts of the control software programs utilized in the DDC system. 7. Flow charts of the custom software programs utilized in the DDC system as approved. 8. Complete program listing file and parameter listing file for all programs. 9. A copy of the warranty. 10. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions. 11. Recommended spare parts list. 1.7 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA standards. 2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices for electric control systems. 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control sequences. 4. Comply with NEPA 70, "National Electric Code" for all electrical installation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 4 equipment, and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. 1.9 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: (See Section 23 0000) A. Purpose is to provide a transition of the systems from the Contractor to the Owner, leaving the Owner's personnel familiar with and well qualified to operate and maintain the systems. B. Instruction to cover purpose and function of each system and its components, to show proper operating technique, to show proper maintenance technique. C. Prepare an outline of information to be conveyed, list materials available for reference. Submit to Architect along with a proposed schedule of instruction. Schedule to allow individual time for each trade and each system. D. Convey information in formal classroom session. Teachers to include qualified contractor personnel and sales representatives for each major piece of equipment. Go from the classroom to the actual location to graphically illustrate concepts discussed. 1.10 WARRANTIES: A. As part of the overall project warranty, furnish individual manufacturer warranties for each piece of equipment for a period of not less than one year from date of Owner's beneficial use (substantial completion). B. Warrant the overall assembly of equipment, materials and labor comprising these systems. 1.11 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: All instruments, control panel and control piping shall be thoroughly cleaned before final acceptance. Provide lubrication for all furnished equipment. 1.12 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM: A. During the system commissioning, testing and balancing of the various building systems, have a controls representative(s) present and available to interpret and adjust controls as needed. Demonstrate and report the integrity and accuracy of each function and control point. B. At the termination of the testing period, the Controls representative shall spend one working day instructing the Owner's operating personnel in the control system operation, and one working day checking each system for day-night and manual override with the Owner's operating personnel on each air system. A complete operating booklet shall be provided and used during the training period. Schedule this training with the Owner and Mechanical Contractor. 1. Since system performance is partly a function of climatic conditions, the Controls contractor shall be available during the changing seasons of the warranty period to make further adjustments and modifications if required. A final complete check of all systems shall be made at the conclusion of the one year warranty period. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL CABINETS: Furnish stamped steel with hinged door and locking latch control cabinets to protect and conceal all control devices. Arrange components neatly to provide adequate maintenance opportunity and proper device function. Label all components, numerically code all piping and wiring. Terminate all wiring at terminal blocks. Provide engraved plastic labels for all panel face devices. Provide all panel wiring identification in compliance with BYU-Idaho Standards. A. Provide with surge suppressor - one per panel. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 5 B. Provide with 120/60/1 outlet - one per panel. C. Provide with fuse - quantity as required. D. Provide with transformer, 120/24 VAC, quantity as required. E. Provide RS-232 service trunk from main panel into each ATC panel for "Laptop" computer access. 2.2 CONTROL DAMPERS: A. In supplying dampers, instruct the sheet metal (233300) workers in the proper installation of the dampers. Ductwork shall be reinforced and the damper properly supported without strain. B. Protect all dampers mounted in a duct system which requires special treatment. C. Provide damper operators with diaphragms or motors of proper size, so that the motors will operate against the static pressure of the systems. Provide each damper motor with a bracket for attaching to ductwork, building structure or equivalent. Damper motors in plenums shall be mounted on damper frames. Do not install motors in ducts. Modulating motors where indicated shall be provided with integral stops for both minimum and maximum stop. D. Control dampers for outside air, relief air, exhaust air, ventilating air and other dampers exposed to weather temperatures in built-up systems. Low leakage type with spring loaded side seals, inflatable butyl or neoprene fabric edge seals, bronze or Teflon bearings, reinforced galvanized steel blades. Blade orientation as indicated on the Motorized Damper Equipment Schedule. Air leakage shall not exceed 10 CFM per square foot at 4" upstream static pressure. Johnson "Proportion-Aire" D-1200/D-1300. Ruskin CD-50 Greenheck VCD-43 Tamco 1000 E. Electric Damper Actuators: Reference Section 230933 for 120 volt damper actuators and Section 230923 for 24 volt damper actuators. 2.3 CONTROL VALVES: A. General: 1. Furnish automatic control valves required by the project. Design valves to pass the quantities of fluid at the pressure drop scheduled on the drawings. 2. Mount all control valves with stems in the up-vertical position. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 6 B. Control Valve Sizes: 1. Valve sizes 2-1/2” through 6” used for controlling heating water, chilled water and up to 50% propylene glycol: Valve body shall be flanged, ANSI Class 125, globe style with cast iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel stem, metal to metal seat, EDPM O-ring packing with equal percentage or linear flow characteristics. Valves shall be of the 2-way or 3-way type as indicated on the Control Valve Schedule. Provide a 5 year manufacturer warranty on the control valves. Siemens Flowrite™ VF 599 Series or equal by T.A.C. or Belimo. 2. Valve sizes 1/2” through 2” used for controlling heating water, chilled water and up to 50% propylene glycol: Valve body shall be threaded, ANSI Class 250, ball style with brass body, stainless steel ball and stem, glass filled PTFE with EPDM O-ring ball seals and steam seals. The valve shall be available in straight through or 3-way mixing with three connections as indicated on the Control Valve Schedule. Minimum close off rating - 200 psi. Provide a 5 year manufacturer warranty on the control valves. Siemens 599 Series or equal by T.A.C. or Belimo. C. Control Valve Operators / Actuators: Reference Section 230923. PART III - CONTROL SEQUENCES 3.1 GENERAL: A. Provide control system to manage and manipulate new air handling system in a functional and energy conserving way. B. Provide additional control panel(s) in the central fan room, with terminal block connections for interface of relief fans, etc. C. Install new control communication wiring per the National Electric Code. Reference Section 230923 for additional detail. D. Set up separate control loop for new fan system with option to favor this system over another, or to have this system independent if the building area is physically isolated from other buildings on campus. 3.2 CENTRAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM: A. Existing Central Control Units provide for overall control and monitoring of the existing Building System. B. Existing DDC panels also provide programmable time clock functions, optimum start, and signals to ATC panels and report space temperature and condition of air handling systems and other mechanical systems. C. Provide a new DDC control panel in the fan room where the new air handling system will go or modify the existing DDC Control panel. D. Provide a run time accumulator function on all pieces of HVAC equipment 5 HP and above. 3.3 CAMPUS INTERFACE: A. Connect new control systems into the existing Building Automation System in place. 3.4 VARIABLE VOLUME SUPPLY FANS SF-1 (Total of 9) STATIC PRESSURE CONTROL 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 7 SEQUENCE: A. In automatic mode, each supply fan wall VFD starts through the fan wall controller via the DDC system, all safeties satisfied. In “Hand”, the supply fans will run when all safeties are satisfied. B. Control the speed of the supply fans through the duct static pressure sensor in order to maintain the far end duct static pressure set point at approximately 0.5" w.c. Locate the duct static pressure sensor upstream of the most remote terminal box on the system in order to provide a signal to the DDC duct pressure controller. The DDC controller will provide a 4-20 ma input signal to the fan wall controller serving the supply fan variable speed drives. See Specifications under Section 230513 related to the variable speed drive. C. Interlock the variable speed drives to the building fire alarm and to the safeties relay to provide shutdown upon smoke detection, freezing conditions or high duct pressure conditions. Interlock the variable speed drives with respective building relief fans. Activate the fan wall controller through the central control panel. D. Interlock the unit’s outside air damper(s) to close and the unit’s return air damper(s) to open when the supply fan wall is off or during unoccupied mode. E. Close the unit’s chilled water control valve to the unit’s cooling coils when the unit’s supply fans are off or during unoccupied mode. F. Open the respective heating water control valve to the unit’s preheating coils when the unit’s supply fans are off or during unoccupied mode. G. During occupied mode, the unit’s outside air dampers open at least to minimum position when the supply fans run. H. Set up the system so that the supply fan wall speed can also be set and adjusted manually. 3.5 VARIABLE VOLUME FAN SYSTEM TEMPERATURE CONTROL (BUF-1): A. The DDC system shall control the system temperature. B. The required makeup air overridden with maximum allowable VOC and CO2 levels set the amount of minimum outside air required. This shall be set so as to maintain a positive pressure in respect to the outside. The economizer control shall override the minimum outside air when outside conditions allow for free cooling. The return air damper(s) shall track the outside air damper(s). C. A control loop sensing the discharge air temperature will modulate the unit’s chilled water control valve, economizer dampers or pre-heating water control valve to maintain a discharge temperature set point of 55°F (adjustable). Provide a discharge temperature sequence per local energy code which resets the discharge temperature set point higher if the respective worst case VAV box cooling demand is satisfied. D. When the outside air temperature is favorable operate the unit in an economizer cycle by 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 8 modulating that unit’s the return air and outside air dampers to maintain a mixed air temperature of 55°F (adj.), optimized for minimum mechanical cooling. Reset the low limit along with the chilled water control valves to use outside air for cooling. Once the outside air temperature exceeds 75°F (adj.), the outside air damper(s) shall close to minimum position. E. If the discharge air temperature setpoint cannot be met by the use of outside air, the chilled water control valve shall modulate open to provide chilled water to the cooling coil(s). The chilled water return temperature shall be sensed with input into the system controller to ensure that the chilled water is being fully utilized. F. If the discharge air temperature falls below 55°F (adj.) due to minimum outside air requirements, the unit’s pre-heating water control valves shall modulate open in order to maintain a discharge air temperature of 55°F (adj.) setpoint. 3.6 BUILDING STATIC PRESSURE CONTROL SEQUENCE (RAF-1, RAF-2, MD-1, MD-2): A. Each relief fan shall be controlled by its respective variable frequency drive through the central automation system. B. In auto, each relief fan cannot run if the related supply fan wall is off. In hand or bypass, each relief fan will run. Each relief damper shall be interlocked with its respective relief fan to open when the fan runs. C. A space differential pressure sensor in location as indicated on the Control Diagram sends a signal to the central automation system. The set point in the building shall be set to maintain a 0.03" (adj.) positive space pressure related to outside. D. When the space differential pressure set point rises above set point, the relief fans shall be staged on in a rotating manner as needed to maintain the space differential set point. First each relief fans damper opens and then the active relief fan ramps up in speed to maintain the space differential pressure set point. With the first relief fan running at full speed and if the space differential pressure set point continues to rise above set point then a second relief fan shall be activated to operate in a similar manner. This process continues until both of the relief fans are operating at full speed as needed to maintain the space differential pressure set point. 3.7 NIGHT SET BACK CONTROL SEQUENCE: A. The building DDC system has the new air handling system running during unoccupied hours. B. Should the unoccupied temperature drop to 68°F (adj.), the related space sensor(s) activate the new air handling system’s heating functions until the temperature rises to 68°F 3.8 MINIMUM OUTSIDE AIR: A. For the new air handling system, the respective outside air damper(s) modulate open to minimum position as needed to lower the CO2 and volatile organic concentration levels in 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 230900 - 9 their respective areas below set point. 3.9 CO2 AND VOC MONITORING: A. Air quality sensors mounted in the new air handling unit’s return air opening monitor the average level of carbon dioxide and volatile organic concentration levels in the respective occupied space and sends a signal to the DDC system to modulate, the unit’s outside air damper(s) in order to keep these levels below the maximums allowed. 3.10 CHILLED WATER RETURN TEMPERATURE: A. For the new air handling system the cooling coil chilled water return temperature shall be sensed with input into the unit’s DDC controller to ensure that the chilled water serving the air handling unit is being fully utilized. When the cooling coil CHWR temperature is at setpoint or above, the cooling coil chilled water control valve modulates open as needed to maintain the CHWR setpoint allowing building CHWR to flow back to the Central Plant. When the CHWR temperature is below setpoint, the cooling coil chilled water control valve modulates closed as needed to maintain the delta T setpoint between CHWR and CHWS serving the cooling coil. The building CHW system is conversely made up from CHWS from the Central Plant. END OF SECTION 230900 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923 - 1 SECTION 23 0923 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: See Section 230900. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The scope of work shall include all labor, material, and equipment necessary to complete the temperature control work for the entire project. A. Extend and connect control wiring from indicated control components to new Local Application Specific Controller serving the new Air Handling Unit located in the local fan room. B. Extension of BACnet communication wiring from the existing BAS to the new Air Handling Unit Local Application Specific Controller. C. Adjustment and validation of modified and new control systems. Instruction of Owner's representative on maintenance and operation of modified and new control equipment. D. Remote Monitoring and Control Communications capability through direct communication to the Owner’s existing Metasys Central Operators Workstation. E. The modified system shall include but not be limited to controls and equipment as hereinafter specified. 1. Air Handling System 2. Building Static Pressure Control 3. Relief Fan Control 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: See Section 230900. A. This specification wording is based on Johnson Controls, Inc. Metasys System product line which is the existing building automation system in place. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: See Section 230900. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: See Section 230900. 1.6 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: See Section 230900. 1.7 WARRANTIES: See Section 230900. 1.8 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: See Section 230900. 1.9 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM: See Section 230900. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923 - 2 PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL CABINETS: See Section 230900. A. Panel mount all controllers and devices other than remote sensors and operators. Provide permanent labels, terminal blocks, etc. 2.2 CONTROL SOURCES: A. POWER SUPPLY: 1. Furnish complete power supply for new application controller at appropriate voltage and in adequate capacity. Load power supply unit to no more than 70 percent of nameplate capacity. 2. Run all power wiring in conduit, neatly arranged and coordinated with other trades. Plenum rated cable may be used above fully accessible ceilings only. Securely anchor and note in organized fashion. 3. Group boxes served by each power supply unit in proximity, provide permanent mounted schedule of boxes served by each power supply. B. COMMUNICATIONS CONDUCTORS: 1. Connect new Application Specific Controller (ASC) into the existing Network Control Units (NCU) extending back to the Central Microprocessor with required conductors. Avoid common conduit with AC voltage or inductive loads. All in accordance with National Electric Code, conductors either plenum rated cable or installed in conduit (3/4" minimum). The LAN Network shall be twisted pair or coax. 2. Utilize existing central communications panel and fiber optic hub. 3. Utilize existing communications from hub back to Physical Plant. 2.3 DAMPERS: See Section 230900. 2.4 ELECTRIC DEVICES: See Section 230933. 2.5 DIRECT DIGITAL SYSTEM CONTROLLERS (DDC): A. Connect to existing in place. 2.6 NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS: A. Existing: 2.7 STANDALONE NETWORK CONTROL UNITS (NCU): A. Existing: 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923 - 3 2.8 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER (ASC): A. Each fan system/air handler shall be controlled by a stand-alone DDC controller. The controller shall include all hardware and programs. B. The DDC controller application programs shall reside in the DDC controller providing stand- alone control when host communication is not possible. The application program shall be maintained at the DDC controller in E2PROM. The default database, i.e., setpoints and configuration information, shall be stored in E2PROM. C. DDC controllers requiring the application or database to be downloaded from a host shall not be acceptable. The zone controller shall run the control application using the default setpoints and configuration even after a power failure with host disabled. D. Controllers integrated with pneumatic damper actuators shall be furnished with electric to pressure function modules. 1. Function modules shall have a manual/auto override selection mode with an on/off switch for binary outputs, 0-20 psi hand gradual switch for pneumatic outputs. E. The existing NCU Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the use of remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). F. Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor. G. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases including: 1. Generic Input/Output Monitor & Control 2. Control Processes 3. Energy Management Applications 4. Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal) H. Application Specific Controllers shall directly support the temporary use of a portable service terminal. The capabilities of the portable service terminal shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Display temperatures 2. Display status 3. Display setpoints 4. Display control parameters 5. Override binary output control 6. Override analog setpoints 7. Modification of gain and offset constants 8. Modified selected HVAC configuration programs and down load modifications. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923 - 4 I. Each ASC shall be able to accept nickel resistant, voltage or current input sensors. 2.9 POWERFAIL PROTECTION: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the controller. 2.10 APPLICATION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE: A pre-written ASC HVAC software program shall be provided to the owner with common ASHRAE HVAC sequences of operations for single zone, multizone, VAV units. This software program shall have pre-written sequences of operations where the owner can select system designs, with prompted default values or configure HVAC ASC for generic input/output for monitor and control. A. Software program shall be capable of printing out owner selected sequence of operation, setpoints, and ASC predetermined wire termination guide for each input/output point. B. Prior to putting Application Specific Controller on-line in an HVAC operating environment, the application specific software shall have a commissioning mode, so the owner can simulate the control sequence through assigning default values or by actual, connecting hardware to the ASC Controller at the owner's lab or test bench. 2.11 AHU CONTROLLERS: A. AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems with prewritten application specific software: 1. Generic Input/Output Monitor and Control 2. Large Air Handling Units 3. Mixed Air-Single Path a. Mixed Air-Dual Path b. 100% Single Path c. 100% Dual Path B. AHU Controller shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion. The minimum point type and quantity shall be as follows: 1. Analog Inputs - 8 2. Binary Inputs - 8 3. Binary Outputs - 10 4. Analog Outputs - 6 C. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923 - 5 D. AHU controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform HVAC sequence of operation or generic input/output monitor and control, without the operator having to use programming languages. E. OCCUPANCY-BASED STANDBY/COMFORT MODE CONTROL: Each AHU Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the AHU Controller shall automatically select either Standby or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying comfort conditions. F. ALARM MANAGEMENT: Each AHU Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications. 2.12 RELAY KIT (RLY): A relay kit with manual override switch shall be furnished and installed on all digital outputs signals for start/stop of the Air Handling Units and associated equipment. The relay kits shall be installed for ease of maintenance and manual overriding of binary output points. Each relay kit shall have the following built-in features: A. Auto/Manual Switch to Enable/Disable Local Control B. Separate On/Off Buttons for Override Control C. Local Relay Kit Monitoring Contact to advise the operator at the NCU or Operator's Workstation if any of the Auto/Manual Switches have been placed in the Manual Override Position. D. Override switches shall be able to operate the motor loads or starter coils whether the controller is powered or de-energized. 2.13 ELECTRIC DAMPER ACTUATORS FOR OUTSIDE, RETURN, AND RELIEF DAMPERS: A. Electronic direct-coupled actuators shall be provided. The actuator shall be fastened to the damper shaft via a clamp assembly of a V bolt design, with associated V shaped toothed cradle. Where direct-couple mounting is not feasible, provide factory cataloged brackets, mounting kits, and hardware. All outside air, return air, relief air, return/relief air and exhaust air motorized dampers shall be provided with an internal mechanical spring return mechanism built into the actuator housing. Non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operations shall not be acceptable. Spring return actuators shall be capable of CW or CCW mounting. All outside air, relief air and exhaust air dampers shall be normally closed. All return air and return/relief air dampers shall be normally open. The actuators shall be of sufficient capacity to provide a minimum of 5 in-lb/sq.ft. for opposed blade dampers and 7 in-lb/sq.ft. for parallel blade dampers. All actuators shall be brushless DC motors. Mounting shall provide for servicing and proper alignment with the damper shaft to minimize drag and slippage on the shaft. B. Actuators shall be UL Standard 873 listed. The actuator shall be have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the entire rotation of the actuator. Mechanical end switches or magnetic clutch protection shall not be acceptable. All 24 VAV/VDC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring, and shall not require more than 10 VA for AC, or more than 8 watts for DC applications. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 3 foot electrical cable, and shall be pre-wired. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator’s rated torque, and shall have a 2 year unconditional manufacturer’s warranty. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923 - 6 C. Proportional actuators shall provide a 2-10 VDC or 4-20mA operating range, and shall provide a 2-10 VDC position feedback signal. An actuator capable of accepting a pulse width modulating control signal and providing full proportional operation of the damper is acceptable. All modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow the reversing of direction of rotation. D. Where noted on the drawings, provide damper operators to meet Class I Div II and Class II Div II requirements. E. Manufacturer: Johnson, Seimens, Belimo. 2.14 VALVE ACTUATORS: A. General: Furnish valve actuators with adequate capacity to operate the valve smoothly through the operating range. Provide oversized motors or operator if needed. Voltage ranges shall be adjustable. B. Valve actuators for control of hot water and chilled water shall be of the modulating type with a range of at least 100 to 1. Valves actuator shall be electric with either proportional or incremental control. Reference Section 230900 for description of control valve bodies. 2.15 PRESSURE SWITCH FOR DIRTY FILTER INDICATION: A. .05 - 12" wg adjustable Dwyer 1630 B. Johnson P-32 2.16 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS: A. General: Differential pressure sensors shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure. The sensor shall connect to the remote controller by means of a function module kit. Use 0-3 WC for duct static and 0-.3" WC for building static. Sensor accuracy shall be plus or minus 2% of the span. Reference sensor to outside for duct static control. B. Sensor/Transmitter Air: Dwyer Series 600 with control point at 60 percent of scale range. Furnish adjustment tool, mounting hardware, tubing adapters, sensing insertion tube. Provide power supply. Mount unit in cabinet at mechanical room. Extend 3/8" minimum tubing to sensing point (both duct and reference). Deliver 4-20 ma signal to receiver/controller. C. Receiver Controller: Johnson Controls Series to accept and condition duct sensor/transmitter signal for delivery to VFD. Install complete with VFD package. Independent systems for both heating and cooling services. 2.17 HAND/AUTO SWITCHES, manual analog output devices (potentiometers), hand graduals, etc., as needed. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923 - 7 2.18 TEMPERATURE SENSORS: A. Furnish and install electronic room, duct and immersion temperature transmitters of the linear precision resistance element of resistance averaging element. Their range shall be -55oF to 250oF with an accuracy of plus or minus .25oF. Limited range sensors shall be acceptable provided they are capable of sensing the range expected for the point at the specified accuracy. B. Temperature sensors shall be of the thermistor (PTC) nickel wire, or silicon type with a high resistance change versus temperature change to insure good resolution and accuracy. Sensors shall be available for room, duct or wall mounting. Sensors shall connect to remote controller by means of a two-wire unshielded cable. Room type sensors shall be available with built-in setpoint potentiometer and programming jack. Sensors shall be available in various ranges to properly suit the application. 1. Johnson Controls Inc. TE-6000 series (temperature sensor only), Johnson Controls Inc. 2. HE-6413 series (humidity/temperature). C. Duct-mounted averaging type temperature sensor shall utilize a nickel resistance sensing element incorporated in a copper capillary of 27 feet. The sensor shall vary the output voltage with a change in temperature. Sensor shall connect to the remote controller by means of a three-wire unshielded cable. Johnson Controls Inc. TE-6000 series. D. Outdoor air sensor shall be of the PTC silicon, nickel or RTD type with a high resistance change versus temperature change. Sensor shall be available for outdoor or duct mounting. Sensor shall connect to remote controller by means of a two-wire unshielded cable. Shield outside air sensing transmitter from the effects of sunlight. E. Where transmitters are used for sensing liquid temperatures, furnish with brass separate wells. 2.19 AIR DUCT DETECTORS: Furnished, installed and wired by Division 26, Electrical Contractor. 2.20 LOW LIMIT THERMOSTATS: A. Provide manual reset low limit thermostats in the leaving air of each coil that is subject to freezing conditions and as specified elsewhere in these specifications. Thermostats shall have a 20 foot (minimum) element and shall respond to the coldest one foot section of that element. Provide sufficient thermostats to adequately protect the entire coil face area (a minimum of one for every 40 square feet of coil). Unless otherwise specified, activation of the low limit thermostat shall stop the air handling unit, close the outside air damper. 2.21 NETWORK TERMINAL: A. Utilize existing in place. 2.22 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD): The VFD's shall be furnished and installed as specified. A. The DDC controller shall furnish required 4-20ma control signal to modulate the VFD. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923 - 8 PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 COMPLETE SYSTEM: A. Integrate into all new controls into the existing Johnson Controls System. Provide all controls and related functions, with all power and communications wiring, with sensors, actuators, valves, dampers, etc. B. Participate in the checkout and commissioning and shake out of all of the new mechanical systems. Provide complete and detailed checkout and testing of all new controls and control sequences. Provide thermal rise trend recording and logs during system testing and shake out, which includes, but is not necessarily limited to thermal trend for; sequence during simulated campus CHW failure operation, and sequence during simulated chiller failure and operation sequence before thermal load and with thermal load. C. Contractor shall coordinate with BYU-Idaho personnel to get Ethernet jacks installed. For communication from front-end server to the jack panels in the field. 3.2 CONTROL SEQUENCES: A. The sequences of control for the DDC system shall be equivalent to those specified for the base bid system with the added benefits of programmable algorithmic control. B. Fully describe the sequences in the submittals. C. Fully document all work by shop drawing and product bulletin submittal, work from reviewed drawings, maintain record documents during installation and provide a complete "As-Built" document set in Autocad 2020 or latest version at completion. 3.3 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE: A. GENERAL: The modified system installation shall be complete and tested for proper operation prior to acceptance testing for the Owner's authorized representative. A letter shall be submitted to the Architect requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are installed and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance testing will commence at a mutually agreeable time within ten (10) calendar days of request. When the field test procedures have been demonstrated to the Owner's representative, the system will be accepted. The warranty period will start at this time. B. FIELD EQUIPMENT TEST PROCEDURES: All new DDC controls panels shall be demonstrated via a functional end to end test. Such that: 1. All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and their operations verified. 2. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation. 3. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field device and observing the appropriate change of displaying value. 4. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed point and all interlocked points. 5. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into the system and observing the proper corrective system response. 6. Selected time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and observing the correct response on the controlled outputs. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS (DDC) 230923 - 9 C. WORKSTATION TEST PROCEDURES: The system workstation test procedures shall be as follows: 1. Communication with each new DDC control panel shall be demonstrated. 2. Operator commands will be explained and demonstrated. 3. Control sequences shall be demonstrated for proper operation. 4. All available system reports and logs shall be demonstrated at the system workstation. 5. Correct system start-up and shutdown procedures shall be demonstrated. 6. All controllers shall be demonstrated to operate in a standalone mode. D. AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION: See Section 230900. E. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: See Section 230900. END OF SECTION 230923 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0933-1 SECTION 23 0933 - ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: See Section 230900. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Electric control functions and systems indicated on the drawings and specified herein. B. Complete interrelationships with automation systems and mechanical equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: See Section 230900. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: See Section 23 09 00. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: See Section 230900. 1.6 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: See Section 230900. 1.7 WARRANTIES: See Section 230900. 1.8 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION: See Section 230900. 1.9 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM: See Section 230900. PART II - MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY: A. Obtain power from Division 26 distribution panel. Furnish appropriate circuit breakers and extend conduit and wiring assigned to this division. B. Furnish and install UL listed voltage reducing transformers required for this work. Size transformers to see no more than 70 percent of rated capacity at full load. Use industrial quality "machine tool" grade transformers. C. Make all electrical installations in conformance with the National Electrical Code (current edition) and in accordance with Division 26. D. Use same product lines for similar devices as used by electrician to result in a coherent project. E. Control Wiring: 1. In concealed locations above lay-in ceilings low voltage conductor may be installed without conduit. Low voltage conductor shall be UL listed Article 725 Plenum Cable. Install the cable parallel to building walls. 2. In all other building areas, ie., electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, high temperature water rooms, above “hard” ceilings, within walls, etc., all control wiring shall be installed in conduit per National Electric Code. Installation shall be square with the walls of the buildings. 3. Number and code all wiring. F. Use no wire smaller than 16 gauge, no conduit smaller than 1/2". 2.4 SMOKE DETECTORS: For installation in all fan systems above 2,000 cfm, systems 15,000 cfm and larger require two such, one in return, one in supply air, furnished by Division 260000 and installed by this Division. Power and fire alarm wiring by Division 260000, control circuit alarm 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS 23 0933-2 contact by this Division. 2.5 FREEZESTATS: Manual reset, non-averaging, extended capillary tubes. Honeywell L-480G, Johnson A11A-I/A70HA-1. Penetrate plenum wall with grommet protection, support capillary on 1/4" copper tubing. Use DPDT action as needed or auxiliary relays with powered circuits. 2.6 FIRESTATS, HI-LIMIT THERMOSTAT: Manual reset, break on rise for protection, make on rise for alarm with relay needed to make on rise. Honeywell L-4029E. Johnson A25AN-1 2.7 AUXILIARY RELAYS: Light Duty - Honeywell R4222/R8222. Heavy Duty - Square D, Class 8501, Type X. T-E, S & S. END OF SECTION 230933 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000-1 SECTION 23 2000 - GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is Division 232113 General Pipes and Fittings section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to pipes and pipe fittings specified herein. C. Division 230000 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This section is generic in that it describes material and installation required by several other sections of this specification. B. Types of pipes and pipe fittings specified in this section include the following: 1. Steel Piping 2. Copper Piping 3. Grooved Joint Piping 4. Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products. C. Pipes and pipe fittings furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pipes and pipe fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Firm with at least three years history of successful experience on projects of similar nature. 2. Licensed as a firm in the contractor state of origin and in the State of Utah. 3. Have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the contractor. 4. All workmen employed on the project to carry state licenses as journeyman or apprentice pipe fitters with additional certification for welders. C. Welding Certification: 1. Each welder shall have passed a qualification test within the past six months prior to working on the project. 2. The test shall be in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding Qualifications", ASME Section VIII, and ANSI 313. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000-2 3. The test report shall certify that the welder is qualified to weld the material to be used at the job site in the positions required (flat, verticle, overhead etc). 4. Submit three copies of each welder's qualification test report to the Project Manager for approval prior to commencing the work. No welder shall be used on the project until so certified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe and pipe fitting. Submit piping schedule showing manufacturer, pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each piping system. B. Welding Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work. C. Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of mechanical fitting. Include this data, product data, and certifications in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes And Standards: 1. Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work. 2. Brazing: Certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping work. 3. NSF Labels: Where plastic piping is indicated to transport potable water, provide pipes and pipe fittings bearing approval label by National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Store pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending. B. Store pipe in a manner to prevent dirt and debris from entering piping. When possible store steel and copper pipes and tubing inside and protected from weather. Whether stored inside or outside elevate above grade and enclose with durable waterproof wrapping. Raise slightly one end of sealed piping to prevent accumulations of condensate and pitting where condensate accumulates. C. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000-3 PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: A. Piping Materials: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall thickness or Class) indicated for each service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer for installation requirements, and comply with governing regulations and industry standards. Use United States (domestic) manufactured pipe only. Do not use foreign made pipe. B. Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwise indicated, comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and with pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. Use domestic manufactured fittings only. Do not use foreign manufactured fittings. 2.2 STEEL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS: A. Black Steel Pipe: Seamless or ERW, ASTM A 53. B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53. C. Galvanized Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53. D. Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135. E. Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 671, A 672, or A 691. F. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated. G. Unions: ANSI B16.39; 300 lb. ground joint malleable iron, hexagonal, selected by Installer for proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as indicated. H. Dielectric Unions: 175 psig WSP at 250oF. Equal to Clear Flow Dielectric Waterway Fittings. Install per manufacturers requirements. I. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14. J. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Material Group: Group 1.1. 2. End Connections: Buttwelding. 3. Facings: Raised-face. 4. Steel Pipe Flanges For Waterworks Service: AWWA C207. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000-4 K. Forged-Steel and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP-79 for threaded reducer inserts; rated to match schedule of connected pipe. L. Forged Branch-Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. M. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2", and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-nipples). 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS: A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88; Type K, L (wall thickness) as indicated for each service; hard-drawn temper, except as otherwise indicated. Do not use Type M piping. B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306. C. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B 280. D. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.18. E. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22. F. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23. G. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29. H. Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26. I. Bronze Pipe Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.24. J. Copper-Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. 2.4 GROOVED PIPING PRODUCTS: (Only where acceptable.) A. General: At Installer's option, mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be used for piping systems having operating conditions not exceeding 230oF (110oC), excluding steam piping, condensing water return to pump, and any other service not recommended by manufacturer, in lieu of welded, flanged, or threaded methods, and may also be used as unions, seismic joints, flexible connections, expansion joints, expansion compensators, or vibration reducers. B. Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest published literature. (Victaulic style 77) For rigid joints (Victaulic "Zero Flex" style 07). 1. Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47. 2. Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000-5 3. Standard: Enamel coated, options hot dip galvanized. C. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000. 1. Water Services: EPDM Grade E, with green color code identification. 2. Other Services: As recommended by Manufacturer. D. Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile 110,000 psi. 1. Exposed Locations: Tamper resistant nuts. E. Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts. F. Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings. 1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. 2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. 3. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A 53, Type F for 3/4" to 1-1/2"; Type E or S, Grade B for 2" to 20". 4. Steel: ASTM A 234. G. Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole alignment. 1. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. 2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536. H. Specialties: 1. Dielectric couplings. Victaulic Style 47. I. Grooves: Conform to the following: 1. Standard Steel: Roll grooved. 2. Ductile Iron: Radius cut grooved, AWWA C606. J. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products of one of the following: 1. ITT Grinnell Corp. 2. Victaulic Co. of America. 3. Gustin-Bacon 4. Anvil Gruvlok K. Coordination with Section 23 07 00: Insulation of coupled piping is more difficult and expensive than is that of welded piping related to couplings, coupling ears, and more 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000-6 involved support. Where coupled piping is used, include all extra cost in the proposal. Install such at no additional cost to the owner. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS: A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Use no lead bearing solders in domestic water applications. 1. Tin-Antimony Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA. 2. Silver-Lead Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade 96TS. C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 1. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. E. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non-Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping connectors of the following: a. Fernco, Inc. F. Strainers: 1. Y pattern, self cleaning, line size. Armstrong, Bailey, Crane, Fisher, Metraflex, Mueller, Sarco, Strong, or Yarway. a. Iron Body, Screwed Ends 2" and Smaller: 250 psig at 425oF, screen mesh to suit service. b. Flanged Iron Body 21/2" and Larger: 125 psig steam pressure rating, screen mesh to suit service. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000-7 PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently- leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible union, flanges, etc., for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Do not cold spring. Store filler weld materials in accordance with codes. 1. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. B. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1" clearance outside insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated. Provide high point vents, low point drains with valves and extension to drain for all piping. C. All piping in fan rooms, etc., shall be exposed. Do not conceal or imbed piping in walls, floors or other structures. D. Make changes in direction or size with manufactured fittings. Anchor and support piping for free expansion and movement without damage to piping, equipment or to building. E. Arrange piping to maintain head room and keep passageways clear. F. Provide unions at connections to equipment and elsewhere as required to facilitate maintenance. G. Run full pipe size through shutoff valves, gas cocks, balancing valves, etc. Change pipe size within three pipe size diameters of final connection to equipment, coils, etc. H. Erect all piping to insure proper draining. Chilled water and heating water shall slope down a minimum of 1" per 40 feet towards the drains. I. On horizontal straight runs of pipe, use eccentric reducers with straight side on top for water piping. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000-8 3.2 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS: A. General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system. B. Threaded: Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. C. Brazed: Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with ASME B31. D. Soldered: Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints where indicated, in accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. E. Welded: 1. Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31. 2. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows: a. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0oF (-18oC) where possible, with minimum pipe preheat to 50oF. b. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5o angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove slag, metal particles and dirt. c. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8 welds for pipe sizes 12" to 20". d. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and non-metallic inclusions. e. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; refabricate to comply with requirements. f. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is indicated; or install regular "T" fitting. g. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe of size smaller than main pipe is indicated; or install regular "T" fitting. F. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000-9 G. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING: A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Flushing shall consist of not less than six (6) short intermittent flushes of five (5) to ten (10) minutes duration. Sample and test each flush for cleanliness. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports and accessory items. 1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31. B. Disinfect water mains and water service piping in accordance with AWWA C601. C. Clean, flush as above and treat heating and cooling systems in accordance with Sections chemical treatment. Certify by signature of Contractor and Owner's Representative. 3.4 PIPING TESTS: A. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 1. Required test period is 2 hours. 2. Test long runs of Schedule 40 pipe at 150 psi, except where fittings are lower Class or pressure rating. 3. Test each piping system at 150% of operating pressure indicated, but not less than 25 psi test pressure. 4. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure. B. Notifications: At least 10 days prior to commencement of required testing, notice shall be submitted for review. Tests shall be made prior to painting insulating or covering of any joints and shall be in accordance with ANSI Code for Pressure Piping. C. Inspections: Contractor to visually inspect piping while under hydrostatic pressure. Copies of inspection shall be submitted for review. At option of contract, welds not hydrostatically tested may be x-ray tested. D. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. E. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed. F. Test pressure piping in accordance with ANSI B31. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GENERAL PIPES AND FITTINGS 23 2000-10 G. Test waste, drain and vent systems in accordance with local plumbing code and these specifications. Repair failed sections by disassembly and reinstallation. H. If test procedures in other sections differ from the above, comply with more stringent requirements. END OF SECTION 232000 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113-1 SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. All pertinent sections of Division 23 “General Mechanical Requirements” are a part of the work described in this section. B. All pertinent sections of Division 23 “General Pipes and Fittings” are a part of the work described in this section. C. Other Specification sections related to Insulation, System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing. 1.2 SUMMARY: Work shown on the drawings and required by these specifications including incidental work classified as "best practices of the trade". A. Glycol heating water systems. B. Glycol chilled water systems. C. Other work as indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of hydronic piping products and equipment of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Firm with at least 3 years history of successful experience on projects of similar nature. 2. Licensed as a firm in the Contractor state of origin and in the State of Utah. 3. Have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor. 4. All workmen employed on the project shall carry state licenses as journeyman or apprentice pipe fitters with additional certification for welders. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical literature indicating source, brand, type, model, performance characteristics, installation instructions, etc. B. Record Drawings: See Division 23. C. Operation And Maintenance Information: Provide information for all equipment including a comprehensive system operating description. See Section 019113. D. Instruction Of Owner's Personnel: Participate in specified instruction. See Division 23. 1. As part of the overall project warranty, furnish individual manufacturer warranties for each piece of equipment for a period of not less than one year from 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113-2 date of Owner's beneficial use (substantial completion). 2. Warrant the overall assembly of equipment, materials and labor comprising these systems. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Standards: Comply with applicable sections, follow recommended practices. 1. State Boiler and Pressure Vessel Regulations 2. ASME Codes for Boilers and Pressure Vessels 3. State and Local Plumbing and Mechanical Codes 4. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code / International Plumbing Code 5. ASHRAE Handbooks PART II - MATERIALS AND METHODS – GLYCOL HEATING WATER, , GLYCOL CHILLED WATER: 2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS: A. Schedule 40 black steel, A-53 with malleable steel threaded fittings up to 2" size and forged steel welding fittings 2-1/2" and larger. Contractor option to use a grooved joint system accommodating for additional support and insulation work. Grooved joint system shall only be used in exposed areas such as mechanical rooms and fan rooms. All piping in shafts and above ceilings shall be either screwed, flanged, or welded. 1. Rigid type “K” or “L” copper, bronze or dielectric interface. C. Drains And Overflow: Install piping of any size from drains and overflows using type K or L copper piping with Solder joint type wrought copper of wrought bronze fittings. Drains and over flows shall be terminated over floor drains or drain funnels adjacent to equipment. Furnish drains from all pump bases to floor drains. D. Water Connections: Provide piping and fittings connecting to the domestic water system, such as fill lines, makeup water lines, etc., of Type K or L copper tubing with solder joint type wrought copper or wrought bronze fittings. Copper piping shall be connected to equipment and steel piping with insulated unions to prevent electrolysis. 2.2 GENERAL SERVICE VALVES: Comply with Section "Valves". A. General: Provide valves complying with Division 23 General Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Valves", in accordance with the following listing. 1. Sectional Valves: a. 2 ½" and Smaller: Ball valves. b. 3" and Larger: Butterfly valves. 2. Shutoff Valves: a. 2 ½" and Smaller: Ball valves. b. 3" and Larger: Butterfly valves. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT 100% REVIEW DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113-3 3. Drain Valves: a. 2 ½" and Smaller: Ball valves. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES AND SPECIALTIES: See Section "Valves". 2.4 CIRCUIT BALANCE VALVES: A. Circuit balance valve for flow balance complying with Section “Valves”. 2.5 VENT VALVES: A. Manual Vent Valves: Provide manual vent valves designed to be operated manually. Use ball valve. B. Automatic Vent Valves: Provide automatic vent valves designed to vent automatically with float principle, stainless steel float and mechanisms, cast-iron body, pressure rated for 125 psi, 1/2" NPS inlet and outlet connections. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering vent valves which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong Machine Works. 2. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 3. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 4. Spirax Sarco. 5. Amtrol. 2.6 STRAINERS: A. General: Y pattern, self cleaning, line size. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide strainers of one of the following: 1. Armstrong 2. Watts 3. Moesco 4. Metraflex 5. Spirax Sarco 6. Mueller C. 2” and Smaller for Copper Pipe: Watts 777 Series, cast bronze body, wye-pattern, 400 psig WSP at 210ºF, 20 mesh 304SS screen, US manufactured threaded connections. (Addendum #3) D. 2" and Smaller for Steel Pipe: Watts No. 77S or equal in Armstrong, 250 lb. iron body, threaded, Y-pattern, 20-mesh stainless steel screen, full size drain connection with ball valve. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT 100% REVIEW DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113-4 E. 2-1/2" and Larger: Watts No. 77F-125 or equal in Armstrong, 125 lb. iron body, flanged, Y-Pattern, stainless steel screen, drain connection with ball valve. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which hydronic piping systems materials and products are to be installed. 3.2 GENERAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION: A. Arrange system in a neat, orderly and functional manner. Maintain access around all equipment. Provide sheeves for all structural penetrations. B. Plan ahead for seismic restraint and vibration isolation. C. Verify adequate ventilation for heat producing equipment, watch out for possible freezing conditions. D. Air Vents and Line Drains: Provide air vents at all high points of piping systems with vent line extended to valve installed in accessible location 5'-0" above the floor, vent line extended to drain. Provide drain valves at all equipment and at low points in the system, extend drain lines to drain funnel or floor sink. E. Provide pressure gauges and thermometers and pressure/temperature plugs as indicated on the flow diagrams, piping plans and equipment details. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC PIPING: A. General: Install hydronic piping in accordance with Division 23 “General Pipes and Fittings." B. Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in direction of flow, with tops of both pipes and reducer flush. C. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Install piping specialties in accordance with Division 23 "Hydronic Piping and Specialties." 3.5 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: A. Install supports and anchors in accordance with Division 23 "Mechanical Supporting Devices." 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VALVES: 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT 100% REVIEW DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113-5 A. Install valves in accordance with Division 23 "Valves." B. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more hydronic terminals or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item and elsewhere as indicated. D. Hydronic Terminal Outlet Valves: Install on inlet of each hydronic terminal, and elsewhere as indicated. E. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain hydronic piping system. 3.7 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. General: Connect hydronic piping systems to mechanical equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. Install shutoff valve and union on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection. B. Hydronic Terminals: Install hydronic terminals with hydronic terminal shut-off valve and union on outlet; union, shutoff valve on inlet. Install manual air vent valve on element in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Locate valves and balancing valves behind valve access doors for ease of maintenance. Where indicated, install automatic temperature control valve with unions on supply line. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES: A. Balance Valves: At locations shown on drawings. B. Vent Valves: 1. Manual Vent Valves: Install manual vent valves on each hydronic terminal at highest point, and on each hydronic piping drop in direction of flow for mains, branches, and runouts, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Automatic Vent Valves: Install automatic vent valves at top of each hydronic riser and elsewhere as indicated. Install shutoff valve between riser and vent valve, pipe outlet to suitable plumbing drain, or as indicated. 3.9 TESTS: A. Isolate sections of piping and equipment and pressure test to 175 psi or 1-1/2 times the maximum potential pressure of the system, but not to exceed the test pressure rating of a system component. 1. Conduct an air pressure test, using a soap solution to check for leaks. Establish the pressure, close off the pressure source and let stand for 24 hours. Given constant temperature, there should be no drop in pressure. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT 100% REVIEW DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2113-6 2. After the air test, fill the system with water, raise to test pressure and inspect for leaks. Repair all leaks. Repeat tests. Report and certify all tests. B. Test other system components as needed to verify proper assembly and installation. C. Participate in overall system test and balance work. END OF SECTION 232113 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT 23 2500-1 SECTION 23 2500 - CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT FILTERS AND EQUIPMENT PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Types of chemical treatment specified in this section include the following: 1. Glycol Heating Water System. 2. Glycol Chilled Water System. 3. Cleaning and Treatment. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLYCOL SYSTEM: Provide and install glycol for each of the revised glycol heating water system and glycol chilled water system complete with the following: A. Glycol: 1. 30% glycol by volume for portion of heating water system related to this project. Inhibited propylene glycol as manufactured by Dow Chemical Dowfrost HD or Union Carbide. 2. 30% glycol by volume for portion of the chilled water system related to this project. Inhibited propylene glycol as manufactured by Dow Chemical Dowfrost HD or Union Carbide. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 GLYCOL HEATING WATER, CAMPUS GLYCOL CHILLED WATER, AND TREATMENT: A. Provide valved bypass lines as needed to allow recirculation. Provide valve connections needed to fill, vent and drain system. B. Flush and clean new and existing systems. C. Provide valved bypass lines as needed to allow recirculation. Provide valve connections needed to fill, vent and drain system. 1. Use a treatment schedule similar to the following, but to be verified compatible with system materials. 2. Fill, circulate, drain system, clean strainers. Use clean water. 3. Fill, introduce sodium triphosphate or suitable degreaser, take the water to operating temperature, circulate for minimum of 5 hours, drain, flush. 4. Fill the heating water, and campus chilled water as noted below: a. Fill heating water systems with new 35% inhibited propylene glycol, Dowfrost HD. b. Fill chilled water systems including existing piping with 35% inhibited propylene glycol, Dowfrost HD. May re-use existing glycol, add 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT 23 2500-2 additional glycol as necessary. END OF SECTION 232500 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK 23 3100-1 SECTION 23 3100 - DUCTWORK PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of ductwork required for the project include the following: 1. Rectangular C. Exterior Insulation of metal ductwork is specified in other Division-23 sections, and is included as work of this section. D. Refer to other Division-23 sections for exterior insulation of metal ductwork; not work of this section. E. Refer to other Division-23 sections for ductwork accessories; not work of this section. F. Refer to other Division-23 sections for fans and air handling units; not work of this section. G. Refer to other Division-23 sections for mechanical controls; not work of this section. H. Refer to other Division-23 sections for roof mounted hoods; not work of this section. I. Refer to other Division-23 sections for filters; not work of this section. J. Refer to other Division-23 sections for system commissioning, testing and balancing; not work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for project. 1. The installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor. 2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK 23 3100-2 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for metal ductwork materials and products. B. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings including, but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spacial relationship between ductwork and proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not reduced. C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal ductwork and ductwork products, in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems". 4. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code: Comply with all sections pertaining to mechanical work. B. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK - GENERAL: A. Standards: All duct fabrications shall comply with standards and techniques detailed by SMACNA "Duct Construction Manuals" for the appropriate pressure class, and with the ASHRAE Handbook, 1988 edition, Chapter 1, Duct Construction 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK 23 3100-3 B. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; mill phosphatized for exposed locations. C. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. Installation of exposed ductwork shall be laid out in advance and submitted for review. Ductwork shall be hung straight and uniform, points shall be true, seams shall show continuity. D. Stainless Steel Assemblies: Fabricate of Type 304 SS or Type 316 SS stainless steel sheet complying with ASTM A-167 with all welded joints and seams. Provide polished No. 4 satin finish for all hoods and duct exposed to view, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill applied adhesive protective paper through fabrication and installation. 2.2 FITTINGS AND FABRICATION: A. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15o change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45o lateral and 45o elbows for branch take-off connections. Where 90o branches are indicated, provide conical type tees. B. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30o for contracting tapers and 20o for expanding tapers. C. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible. Refer to Division-23 section "Duct Accessories' for accessory requirements. D. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and adhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners. E. Offset, transition, adapt ductwork to structural obstacles and work of other trades in a coordinated effort. Layout work to avoid conflict with piping, etc. With review of conditions, teardrop around conflicting piping, lights, etc., all at no added cost to the owner. 2.3 DUCT PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS: A. For all VAV systems, which include but are not limited to 1. From fan discharge to air terminal unit: medium pressure ductwork, 10" w.g. 2. Outside air ductwork and plenums, 10" w.g. 3. Relief air plenums, 3" w.g. 2.4 MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK: (10" SMACNA Pressure Class) 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK 23 3100-4 A. General: At Installer's option, provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of shop- fabricated duct and fittings. B. Double wall Internally Insulated Duct and Fittings: Construct with outer pressure shell, 1" or 2" thick (as indicated on drawings) insulation layer, and perforated inner liner. Construct shell and liner of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, of spiral lockseam construction, use longitudinal seam for over 59", in minimum gauges listed. Use where indicated on drawings. C. Field joints shall be made up using an initial coat of 3M EC-750 adhesive wrapping the joint with a 3" wide fiberglass strip and applying a final seal coat of adhesive to the fiberglass. Duct sections and fittings shall be held in place at joints with sheet metal screws 6" on centers. Simple coating of joint surfaces with mastic prior to joining is not acceptable (SMACNA Std. P.1-11). As an alternative method of duct joint sealing, the joints shall be held in place with screws as specified, but the contractor may use "Thermofit" duct sealing bands as manufactured by Rayclad Tubes of Menlo Park, California. Bands shall be installed according to the manufacturer's directions. The open flame shall not be used in the vicinity of combustible materials. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS: A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. B. Duct Sealing Compound: Duct sealing compound shall be 3M brand number EC-750 or Duro-Dyne S-2. This material shall be used in making up duct joints or in water proofing, caulking plenums, etc. C. Acoustical Lining: Acoustical lining in ducts shall be 1" thick, 1-1/2 pound density, coated, flexible glass fiber type, set in adhesive and impaled on weld studs spaced not more than 12" on centers and secured with lock washers. Airstream surface faced with black coated matte. Acoustical lining shall completely line the ducts. Lining shall have a fire and smoke hazard rating not exceeding 20-50-50. Owens-Corning, Johns-Manville, Certainteed. D. All joints, edges and/or surface breaks in the coating of the acoustical lining shall be pointed up to a smooth surface with adhesive. E. Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 "Specifications for Adhesives and Duct Thermal Insulation". F. Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Article S2.11. G. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement (type applicable for fabrication/ installation detail) as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK 23 3100-5 H. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK: A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems rated over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor. All necessary allowance and provisions shall be made in the installation of sheet metal ducts for the structural conditions of the building, and ducts shall be transformed or divided as may be required. Whenever this is necessary, the required area shall be maintained. All of these changes, however, must be approved and installed as directed at project. During the installation, the open ends of ducts shall be protected to prevent debris and dirt from entering. B. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop- fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements. C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. D. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate. 1. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide firestopping between duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of Section "Firestopping". 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK 23 3100-6 E. Ducts At Structural and Architectural Penetrations: Where ducts are shown connecting to or passing through concrete, gypsum board, masonry openings and along edges of all plenums at floors and walls, provide a continuous 2" x 2-1/8" galvanized angle iron which shall be bolted to the construction and made airtight to the same by applying caulking compound. Sheet metal in these locations shall be bolted to the angle iron. Round high velocity ducts in vertical chases shall be supported with rolled angle rings. Close openings between duct and structure. F. Cross Breaking: Rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be cross broken on the four sides of each 4-foot panel. All vertical and horizontal sheet metal barriers, duct offsets, elbows, as well as 4-foot panels of straight sections of ducts shall be cross broken. Cross breaking shall be applied to the sheet metal between the standing seams or reinforcing angles; the center of cross break shall be of the required height to assure surfaces being rigid. G. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system. H. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 1. Related to final installation cleanliness, damp wipe all ductwork on installation. Cap open duct ends, cover fan inlets, vacuum fan plenums and related installation before starting fans. Run fans only with filters in place. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER: A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. As indicated on the drawings, supply, return and exhaust air ductwork shall be lined with acoustical insulation. In all cases outside air ductwork shall be lined with 2' thick 1-1/2 lb. density acoustical lining unless indicated differently on drawings, ie. requiring Type 2 plenum. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS: A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 3'-0" extended length. No elbows allowed. B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". 3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. It is essential that all ducts shall be rigidly supported. Hangers for low velocity ducts up to 18" in width shall be placed on not more than 10' centers. Low velocity ducts 19" through 35" in width and greater shall be supported on not more than 5' centers. Where vertical ducts pass through floors or roofs, heavy supporting angles shall be attached to ducts, and to structure. Angles shall be of sufficient size to support the ductwork rigidly and shall be placed on at least two 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK 23 3100-7 sides of the duct. B. Construct hangers for rectangular ductwork from galvanized iron l" x 1/16". Hangers shall extend down the sides of rectangular ducts the full depth of the duct and shall be bent underneath the duct 2". Hangers shall be secured to the duct using sheet metal screws or rivets of appropriate sizes on 6" centers, but not less than two screws in the side and one in the bottom of each hanger. C. For rectangular ducts 36" and greater in width construct hangers from galvanized iron 1-1/2" x 1/16". Hangers shall be installed and secured to duct as described in Paragraph B. 3.6 SUPPORTING DAMPERS: Parallel and opposed blade motor operated dampers shall be supported by reinforcing the ductwork or sheet metal walls at the damper locations to carry the weight of the dampers and the force exerted on the dampers due to air pressure, or shall be supported independent of ductwork from the ceiling or floor, as conditions at the site determine. 3.7 CONNECTIONS: Connections of high velocity supply and relief ducts, fittings, and high velocity mixing boxes shall be made airtight by coating joints with Minnesota Mining Co. Mastic, Type EC-800, Benjamin Foster, Sheet Metal Products Co., or approved equal, before joining, and then sealing the joint with one layer of "Glass-Fab" reinforcing tape set in a coating of the above compound. Tape and sealant shall not exceed a flame spread of 25 or a smoke development of 50. 3.8 WELDED JOINTS: Welded ductwork shall have either an angle or a piece of 1/8" steel bar behind each weld to allow laying of a neat and continuous bead. 3.9 AESTHETIC LAYOUTS: Close or cap all duct ends. Use auxiliary blower with air flow meter to establish a duct pressure equivalent to the duct pressure class. Inspect all joints in duct system and seal all identifiable leaks. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Leakage Tests: After each duct system which is constructed for duct classes over 3" is completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Air leaks which are in excess of that required to bubble the soap suds (that is, actually blow the suds away) shall be sealed by additional taping and caulking to reduce the leakage to a rate not to exceed slow bubbles forming. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage conforms with Chart of Figure 4-1, Seal Class A, Leakage Class 3 for round/oval, 6 for rectangular. 3.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION: A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated. 3.12 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean ductwork internally of dust and debris, as follows: Before the ceilings are installed, with filters in place, operate the fans at full capacity to blow out dirt and debris from ducts. If it is not practical to use the main supply blower for this test, the ducts may be blown out in sections by a portable fan. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK 23 3100-8 B. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. C. Balancing: 1. Refer to Division-23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air distribution balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. However, the Sheet Metal Contractor shall participate fully in this work. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process. 2. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment performance or improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical Contractor and his subcontractors shall make any changes necessary to obtain the specified conditions. END OF SECTION 233100 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO BUILT-UP PLENUM SYSTEMS 233213 – 1 SECTION 233213 – BUILT-UP PLENUM SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements and General Pipes and Fittings sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of air-handling unit work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of units specified in this section include the following: 1. Field Built-up Plenum Systems. C. Refer to other Division-23 sections for field-applied insulation to built up plenum systems; not work of this section. D. Refer to Division-16 sections for the following work; not work of this section. 1. Lighting and power outlets with associated conduit and wiring for service inside the units. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of built up plenum system components with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for project. 1. The Installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the contractor. 2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for built up built up systems showing dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance with operating point clearly indicated, motor electrical characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, weight 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO BUILT-UP PLENUM SYSTEMS 233213 – 2 loadings, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to air handling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 230593. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. SMACNA Duct Construction Standards: Comply with standards required for constructing built up fan systems. 2. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate built up fan systems in accordance with AMCA standards. 3. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with ARI 430 "Standard for Central-Station Air Handling Units", display certification symbol on units of certified models. 4. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install refrigerant coils in accordance with ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". 5. NFPA Compliance: Provide air handling unit internal insulation having flame spread rating not over 25 and smoke developed rating no higher than 50; and complying with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 6. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of built up fan systems. 7. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code: Comply with all sections pertaining to mechanical work. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Handle built up plenum systems, panels and components carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to air-handling unit manufacturer. B. Store built up fan systems, panels and components in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping. C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading built up fan systems, and moving them to final location. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO BUILT-UP PLENUM SYSTEMS 233213 – 3 PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILT UP PLENUM SYSTEM: A. General: Provide built up factory system as indicated, of sizes and capacities as scheduled, and as specified herein. 1. Each system shall be field assembled, except for those items requiring field installation such as temperature control components. 2. Each system shall be mounted on a concrete base curb. Provide galvanized mill finish. 3. Provide access doors to service all internal components. Where unit sizes are large enough, access doors shall be of a size capable of allowing a man to pass through. Each door shall have a minimum of 2 heavy-duty hinges and 2 quick- opening latches. Each door to have 6" x 6" wire glass window. 4. Doors shall be operable without the aid of any tools. Each door shall seal air tight with a continuous sponge rubber gasket. 5. The final responsibility for a complete and operable system lies with the mechanical contractor. This contractor shall coordinate the efforts of the equipment supplier and subcontractors to insure that final systems are complete. B. Plenums: 1. Type 1: Non-sound critical plenums and partitions. a. Shall be shop or field fabricated at 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel, from 2' x 10' sheets or portions thereof, with standing seams to make nominal 20" wide by 9'-0" panels. Where plenum height exceeds 9'-0", stiffen each seam with 2-1/2" x 1/8" strip steel between panels, running through joins 12" or more. Seal all joins air tight with mastic on all joining surfaces during assembly. b. May be shop or field fabricated of 2" x 2" x 1/4" galvanized angle iron with an 18 gauge galvanized steel skin, forming not more than 8'-0" x 2'- 0" spacing. Seal all joints air tight. c. Assemble plenums with bolts in areas where equipment (dampers, fans, etc.) must be installed or moved in and out for installation or maintenance. Fixed areas may be welded or bolted at contractor's option. d. Insulate all plenums for acoustic or thermal control. See Section 230700 - “Insulation.” e. Provide internal plenum supports for equipment or long spans, of appropriate pipe or channel shops. The assembly shall be rigid, essentially without deflections or vibrations in the operating condition. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO BUILT-UP PLENUM SYSTEMS 233213 – 4 2. TYPE 2: Insulated panel construction. a. Use factory fabricated system equivalent to Commercial Acoustics, VibroAcoustics, United-McGill "Uni-Housing" system or local fabricator Superior Air Handling or Cherringtons. b. All work to be fully detailed and submitted for review. System to be of 4" thick insulated panels with perforated face on side of noise generation. Any vendor to match or exceed United's cataloged performance for structure and acoustics. c. All joints shall be sealed as the bolted assembly goes together. Identify removable sections related to equipment installation, removal, etc. d. Plenums shall be designed for an operating pressure differential of up to 10" w.c. e. Use this type for the primary cooling and heating fan systems and elsewhere as indicated. Type 2 plenums may be used in lieu of Type 1 in most situations. Discuss and obtain concurrence of engineer, if each is desired. C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Commercial Acoustics 2. Vibro Acoustics 3. United McGill 4. Superior 5. Ruskin PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which built up fan systems are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION OF BUILT UP PLENUM SYSTEM: A. General: Construct built up plenum system where indicated, in accordance with SMACNA duct construction standards and component manufacturer's installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, roof decking, piping, and electrical as necessary to interface installation of built up fan system with other work. C. Access: Provide access space around built up plenum system units for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO BUILT-UP PLENUM SYSTEMS 233213 – 5 D. Support: Install floor-mounted built up plenum system units on 6" high reinforced concrete pad or curb. E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. F. Duct Connections: Refer to Division-23 Air Distribution sections. Provide ductwork, accessories, and flexible connections as indicated. G. Grounding: Provide positive equipment ground for air-handling unit components. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: Upon completion of installation of built up plenum system, start-up and operate equipment to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. B. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment performance or improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical Contractor and his subcontractors shall make any changes necessary to obtain the specified conditions. END OF SECTION 233213 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300-1 SECTION 23 3300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following: 1. Dampers. a. Control dampers. 2. Fire Dampers 3. Turning vanes. 4. Duct hardware. 5. Duct access doors. 6. Flexible connections. C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories; not work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of ductwork accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and methods of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 1.5 REFERENCES: 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300-2 A. Codes and Standards: 1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". 2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated. 3. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers". 4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. B. Storage: Where possible, store accessories inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL DAMPERS: A. Control dampers are furnished by the Mechanical Control Section but installed by this Section. Dampers shall be supported, plenum openings shall be reinforced and the entire assembly shall be sturdy and operate smoothly. Install dampers to direct outside and return air into each other for mixing 2.2 FIRE DAMPERS: A. Curtain type, dynamic, galvanized, steel channel frame, 301 stainless steel closure springs, 1-1/2 hour fire rating, 165°F fusible link, constructed and labeled in accordance with the latest edition of UL Standard 555. Each fire damper shall be rated for dynamic closure to a minimum 2000 fpm and 4 inches w.g. static pressure and shall be rated to close with airflow in either direction. B. Each fire damper shall include a minimum 12” long integral rollformed steel sleeve and mounting angles furnished by the damper manufacturer to ensure appropriate installation. C. Provide dynamic fire dampers based on Ruskin Series DIBDXX or equal by Pottorf, Nailor, Prefco, NCA, or prior approved equal by others. 2.3 TURNING VANES: Turning vanes shall be installed in all square elbows. Turning vanes shall be single blade. Turning vane spacing shall be per SMACNA. Each blade shall be tack welded or crimped to the carrier frame to prevent rattling. 2.4 DUCT HARDWARE: 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300-3 A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following: 1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct test holes, cover, for instrument tests. Ventlok No. 699 closures shall be provided and installed for each test hole, with sufficient neck length to penetrate the insulation. 2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork. (Bare duct - Ventlok 620, 635; Insulated duct - Ventlok 627, 628, 637, 638, 629.) B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the following: 1. Ventfabrics, Inc. 2. Young Regulator Co. 2.5 DUCT ACCESS DOORS: Doors shall be 2" narrower than the duct width by 24" up to a maximum of 24" x 24". Duct access doors shall be furnished for all fire damper links, manual controllers and adjustable balancing devices. Duct access doors for all ductwork (except low pressure ductwork) shall be: Bolted access door, oval shaped constructed of an outer door connected to an inner plate by spring loaded carriage bolts with wing handles. Inner plate to have cellular sponge gasket for leak free operation up to 20"wg. The door shall have permanently bonded polyester insulation. 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: A. Extent of Work: Provide flexible connections between ductwork or plenums and equipment, such as at fan inlets and discharges, and at other places indicated on the drawings or called for by note or specification. B. Non-Corrosive Environment or Airstream: Provide material of heavy waterproof woven glass fabric double coated with neoprene or hypalon equivalent to “Ventglas” for interior locations and “Ventlon” for exterior locations, fabric not less than 3-1/4" wide clamped between strips of 24 gauge galvanized iron. Material by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Ill. C. Corrosive Environments or Airstream: Provide material of heavy waterproof woven fiberglass fabric coated with Teflon equivalent to “Ventel” by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Ill. By nature, the material is slippery and requires rigid clamping in the field installation. Install with the coated side to the corrosive air stream. Clamp the material into a stainless steel edging or hinge with a folded fabric edge. Be careful in securing the clamped fabric to the fan or duct as to not penetrate or disturb any protective coatings or surfaces. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300-4 PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES: A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Install hand operated volume dampers at locations and of sizes shown. Volume dampers shall be controlled by heavy duty locking quadrants mounted on the outside of the duct. Where ducts are insulated, the damper rod shall be extended and the operator shall be mounted on the outside of the insulation. Butterfly dampers may be constructed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. All multi-blade hand dampers shall be the product of one of the manufacturers listed in the Contract Documents. All operator fittings shall be heavy duty commercial grade. C. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply and exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated. D. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is to small for person to enter. E. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action. 1. Label access doors in accordance with Division 23 section "Mechanical Identification". 2. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing". 3. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300-5 3.5 EXTRA STOCK: A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature range; obtain receipt. END OF SECTION 233300 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423-1 SECTION 23 3423 - POWER VENTILATORS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section. C. See Section 23 05 13 Motors, Drives and Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Work. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of power and gravity ventilator work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of power and gravity ventilators specified in this section include the following: 1. Power ventilators. a. Relief Air Fans C. Refer to Division 23 section "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" for balancing of power and gravity ventilators; not work of this section. D. Refer to Division 23 temperature control systems sections for control work required in conjunction with power and gravity ventilators; not work of this section. E. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work; not work of this section. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on ventilators. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer. 2. Interlock wiring between ventilators; and between ventilators and field-installed control devices as shown in Division 26. a. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of power and gravity ventilators, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423-2 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for power and gravity ventilators, including specifications, capacity ratings, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories furnished, and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction details, methods of assembly of components, and field connection details. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to power ventilators. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of power and gravity ventilator, accessory, and control. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 23. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. AMCA Compliance: Provide power ventilators which have been tested and rated in accordance with AMCA standards, and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 2. UL Compliance: Provide power ventilators which are listed by UL and have UL label affixed. 3. NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with NEMA standards. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 RELIEF FANS (RAF-1 & RAF-2): A. Extent of Work: Furnish and install required, direct driven centrifugal square in-line type fans, complete with fan, motor, inlet and discharge flanges. B. General: Fans shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705). Fans shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance. C. Construction: Each fan shall be of bolted construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. Housing shall be minimum 18 gauge steel with integral duct collars. Bolted access doors shall be provided on three sides, sealed with closed cell neoprene gaskets. Housing shall be pre-drilled to accommodate universal feet for vertical or horizontal installation. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO POWER VENTILATORS 23 3423-3 E. Wheels shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of 100% aluminum, including a precision machined cast aluminum hub. Wheel inlet shall overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone. Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204- 05, Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. F. Motor: Motors shall be NEMA design B with a minimum of class B insulation rated for continuous duty and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. G. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the specifications provide relief air fans from one of the following manufacturers. 1. Acme 2. Cook 3. Greenheck 4. Twin City Fans Fan shall be duct mounted, direct driven centrifugal square inline. PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which power and gravity ventilators are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: After installation ventilators has been completed, test each ventilator to demonstrate proper operation of unit at performance requirements specified. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 233423 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3713-1 SECTION 23 3713 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following: 1. Outside Air Hood. C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in conjunction with air outlets and inlets; not work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems work similar to that required for project. 1. The Installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor. 2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following: 1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating construction, finish, and mounting details. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3713-2 3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data. B. Samples: 3 samples of each type of finish furnished. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices. B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTSIDE AIR HOOD (OAH-1) A. General: Supply and install a hooded high efficiency roof mounted gravity intake ventilator as shown on drawings. B. Construction: The unit shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. The hood shall be constructed of minimum 18 gauge aluminum or 20 gauge galvanized steel, bolted to a minimum 8 gauge aluminum or 12 gauge galvanized steel support structure. A radius throat must be provided for optimum performance. Lifting lugs shall be provided to help prevent damage from improper lifting. The base shall have continuously welded curb cap corners for maximum leak protection. Birdscreen constructed of 1/2" galvanized mesh shall be mounted in the hood. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate. Nameplate shall indicate design CFM and static pressure. C. Manufacturers: 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3713-3 1. Cook 2. Greenheck 3. Ruskin 4. Pottorff PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Coordinate with other work, including roofing, ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work. END OF SECTION 233713 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR FILTERS 234116-1 SECTION 234116 - AIR FILTERS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of air cleaning work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of air cleaning equipment specified in this section include the following: 1. Filter Holding Systems. a. Universal Holding Frame for field fabricated air handling systems. b. Factory fabricated for factory fabricated air handlers. 2. Air Filters. a. Replaceable (throwaway). b. Extended surface self-supporting. 3. Filter Gages. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air cleaning equipment of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including, dimensions, weights, required clearances and access, flow capacity including initial and final pressure drop at rated air flow, efficiency and test method, fire classification, and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for filter rack assemblies indicating dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of filter and rack required. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 23. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Standards pertaining to safety performance of air filter units. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR FILTERS 234116-2 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE Standard 52 for method of testing, and for recording and calculating air flow rates. 3. ARI Compliance: Comply with provisions of ARI Standard 850 pertaining to test and performance of air filter units. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR FILTERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, replaceable filter media and holding frames shall be a product of one of the following: 1. American Air Filter 2. Continental 3. Farr 4. Flanders/Eco Air B. Holding Frames: Suitable for filters specified. 1. Field fabricated for built-up system - 16 gauge galvanized steel minimum. Provide stiffening pieces as required to with stand 10" pressure differential. 2. Filter bank sizes as shown on drawings. C. Type 1: Replaceable flat media. 1. Flat panel non-woven cotton fabric in a cardboard holding frame, 1" thick. .26" s.p. initial pressure drop, to change out at 0.50", 20% average efficiency on 85% average arrestance on ASHRAE Test 52-76. 2. Equivalent to Farr 20/20 series. D. Type 2: Replaceable pleated media type filters. 1. Pleated, medium efficiency in a cardboard holding frame, 2" or 4" thick as scheduled, 0.32" s.p. maximum initial pressure drop at 500 feet/minute, to change out at 0.50". U.L. Class 2, 25-30% efficiency, 90-95% arrestance per ASHRAE Standard 52-76. 2. Equivalent to Farr 30/30. E. Type 3: Replaceable rigid cell 80-85% efficiency. 1. Waterproof glass media, folded, separated and supported, reinforced steel enclosure, capable of withstanding a 10" pressure differential. 0.2" s.p. maximum static pressure drop at 250 fpm, to changeout at 1.0". 2. Equivalent to Farr "Riga-Flo" or American Air Filter "Varicell", UL Class 2, efficiency range, as scheduled. F. Filter Gauges: 1. Magnehelic Gauge 0-1" range for flat filters, 0-3" range for high efficiency rigid or lag filters, other gauges to match filter range. 2. Furnish with mounting bracket, pressure tips, tubing vent/zero valves. G. Startup Set: 1. Install a set of Type 2 filters immediately upon fabrication of any filter bank. Install scheduled set of filters at completion of construction at the time of testing and balancing. Second set for replacement at the end of the job. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO AIR FILTERS 234116-3 PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which air filters and filter housings will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. General: Comply with installation requirements as specified elsewhere in these specifications pertaining to air filters housing/casings, and associated supporting devices. B. Install air filters and holding devices of types indicated, and where shown; in accordance with air filter manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; to ensure that filters comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. Filter to be positioned so as air flow pushes filter into frame. C. Locate each filter unit accurately in position indicated, in relation to other work. Position unit with sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames securely to substrate, with spring attachment, provide second spring attachment and seal assembly to fasten prefilter to face of final filter. D. A vertical galvanized metal strip 2" wide and of a gauge equal to the filter frame shall be installed between each and every filter column to increase bank rigidity. E. Coordinate with other work including ductwork and air handling unit work, as necessary to interface installation of filters properly with other work. F. Install filters in proper position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. G. Install air filter gage pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters to indicate air pressure drop through air filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages if any, for proper readings. H. Install 1" sheetmetal strip in bottom of each filter frame. Sheetmetal strip to have upturned ends to allow for easy removal of filter media. I. Install dust collector on 6” high concrete housekeeping pad. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Operate installed air filters to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. 3.4 EXTRA STOCK: A. Provide two sets of filters: one for start-up/balancing use; the second for replacement at the end of the job. END OF SECTION 234116 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CUSTOMIZED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 237300-1 SECTION 237300 – CUSTOMIZED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Furnish and install packaged modular air handling units as described in Contract Documents. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section 1. Three way control valve C. Related Sections 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, fan capacities, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics, casing construction details, wiring interconnections, gauges, and finishes of materials. 2. Manufacturer installation instructions. 3. Fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. 4. Sound power levels for air handling unit(s) at scheduled conditions. 5. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. B. Record Documents 1. Show unit configuration in direction of air flow. 2. Indicate assembly and unit dimensions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certification Requirements 1. Certify air handling unit capacity, static pressure, fan speed, brake horsepower, and selection procedures in accordance with AMCA 210 and ASHRAE Standard 51 2. Certify air coils capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410-87. 3. Certify sound power levels for air handling unit(s) at scheduled conditions. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver air handlers to site on factory-installed 5 or 6 inch high base rail. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials - In addition to construction set, provide one additional set pleated media filters for each air handler. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CUSTOMIZED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 237300-2 PART II PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Fans 1. Fan Wall Technology (FWT) a. The Fan Wall Array, as manufactured by Huntair Inc., shall consist of multiple, direct driven, arrangement 4 plenum fans constructed per AMCA requirements for the duty specified, (Class II,). All fans shall be selected to the design air flow at the specified operating TSP at synchronous motor speed as specified and scheduled. The Fan Wall Array shall be selected to operate at a system Total Static Pressure that does not exceed 90% of the specified fan cartridge peak static pressure producing capability. Each fan/motor cartridge shall consist of an 11 gauge A60 galvanized steel intake wall, 14 gauge spun steel inlet tunnel, and 11 gauge A60 galvanized steel motor support plate and structure. The fan cartridge intake wall, inlet funnel fan wheel, and motor support structure shall be powder coated. All motors shall be standard T-frame motors selected at the specified operating voltage and RPM, and efficiency as specified elsewhere. Entire assembled fan/motor cartridge shall not exceed 165 lbs in total weight unless otherwise specified. Each fan/motor cartridge shall be dynamically balanced to meet AMCA standard 204-96, category BV-5, Grade 1.0 with peak to peak deflection equal to or less than .5 mil at the design operating speed for the fan/motor cartridge. b. The fan array shall consist of multiple fan/motor “cartridges”, spaced in the air way tunnel cross section to provide a uniform air flow and velocity profile across the entire air way tunnel cross section and components contained therein. Each fan cartridge shall be individually factory wired to a factory installed control panel containing two VFDs, sized for the total connected HP for the Fan Wall Array. Wire sizing shall be determined in accordance with NEC standards. Control panel shall be factory installed on the air handling unit with single point power connection. c. The Fan Wall array shall produce a uniform air flow profile and velocity not to exceed the specified cooling coil and/or filter bank face velocity when measured at a point 12” from the intake side of the Fan Wall array septum wall, and at a distance of 42” from the discharge side of the Fan Wall array septum wall. d. Each fan/motor cartridge shall be removable through a 30” wide access door located on the discharge side of the fan wall array. e. The manufacture shall provide a complete spare FWT fan/motor cartridge for emergency replacement, one for each type of assembly provided on the project. f. Individual fans shall not exceed 0.025” per second at the rotational speed of the wheel. Further the sum of all the fans shall not exceed 0.025” per second measured at the fan section base. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CUSTOMIZED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 237300-3 g. Furnish with factory installed straightening grid, coplanar silencer on outlet side of fan, and inlet gravity backdraft damper at each fan. h. Furnish each fan with “flow-cone” airflow measuring with digital read out display showing total of all fan CFMs. Digital read out shall be factory wired. Locate display in the face of the unit mounted control panel. i. Manufacturers: 1) Huntair. 2) Temtrol 3) Governaire B. Motors 1. Fan motors as specified in Section 230513. Premium efficiency, inverter duty. Match motor with variable frequency drive. All motor bearings shall be electrically isolated from the motor housing. C. Main unit Electrical Panel and Wiring 1. The Air Handling Unit shall have an electrical control panel that shall include the wiring for the remote variable frequency drives with necessary fusing and or overload protection. The Air handling unit shall be factory wired requiring only field wiring of VFD wiring to the fan power panel. D. Sound Power Levels 1. The sound power level at the air handling unit discharge, air intake, return air and/or OSA intake, and casing radiated not to exceed the values shown below, when the unit is operating at maximum design airflow and static pressure. The sound power levels are derived from data collected on representative fans shall be calculated in accordance with AMCA Standard No. 300. 2. Maximum octave band sound power level, DB RE 10E-12 watts. 3. Provide sound power data for AHU. E. Approved Manufacturers and Suppliers 1. Huntair 2. Thomsen 3. Temtrol 4. Governaire 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory fabricate and test air handling units of sizes, capacities, and configuration in accordance with Contract Documents. B. On units not shipped fully assembled, tag each section to indicate location in direction of airflow to facilitate assembly at job site. C. Base performance on altitude conditions. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO CUSTOMIZED AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT 237300-4 PART III EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install vibration isolation pads under mounting rail at load points indicated by unit manufacturer. Size shall be as recommended by unit manufacturer. B. Level unit. C. Thoroughly seal and calk pipe and conduit penetrations to casing. D. Seal floor penetrations. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Check and align access doors to ensure smooth operation. B. At start-up, check each fan motor for rotation and amp draw for each phase. Mark reading on fan scroll. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. END OF SECTION 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HEATING AND COOLING COILS 238216-1 SECTION 238216 - HEATING AND COOLING COILS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Extent of heating and cooling coil work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of terminal units required for project include the following: 1. Glycol heating water coils. 2. Glycol chilled water coils. C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for piping and testing, adjusting and balancing of coils, not work of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of terminal units, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for coils showing dimensions, capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction details, and field connection details. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operating and maintenance instructions and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Section 23 01 00. 1.5 REFERENCES: A. Codes and Standards: 1. ARI Compliance: Provide coil ratings in accordance with ARI Standard 410 "Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test coils in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 33 "Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Heating Coils". 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HEATING AND COOLING COILS 238216-2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Handle coils and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged coils or components; replace with new. B. Store coils and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading terminal units, and moving them to final location. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.1 HEATING AND COOLING COILS: A. General: Provide coils of size and in location indicated, and of capacities and having performance data as scheduled. Certify coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410. B. Fins: Corrugated plate sheet aluminum, maximum fins per inch as scheduled, 0.01" sheet thickness minimum. C. Tubes: Copper tube, 5/8" diameter, 0.035" tube, 0.049" bend wall thickness, expand tube into fins. D. Headers: Seamless Type K or L copper tube headers, vented with intermediate row and return bends, brazed connections, threaded steel pipe connections. Add ball type drain and vent valves to each header in field. E. Casings: Construct of 16-ga continuous coated galvanized steel with fins recessed into channels to minimize air bypass. F. Each coil section shall be furnished with a tapered frame, pitched towards the headers to facilitate draining. G. Testing: Air tested under water to 175 psig. H. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide coils of one of the following: 1. Temtrol. 2. USA Coil 2.2 COIL DRAIN PANS: A. Coil Drain Pans: Provide drain pans between each coil and under the entire coil bank, extend lower pan into basin. Construct all pans of 16 gauge 304 or 316 stainless steel. The lower pan shall be at least 6" deep, sloped to drain, hold coil high enough to create a 6" trap off of the lower drain pan(s). Set coil into pans to catch all drips. Refer to drawings for additional detail. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO HEATING AND COOLING COILS 238216-3 PART III - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF COILS: A. General: Install coils as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Chilled and Heating Water Coils 1. Mount coils on steel supports to form banks or stacks as indicated, brace, secure to air intake chamber. Place in location to permit installation of bypass damper if required, provide steel baffles where required to prevent bypassing of air. 2. Pitch coil casings for drainage, not less than 1/8" toward return connections, except where drainage feature is included in coil design. 3. Each bank of cooling coils shall be supported off of floor of sufficient height to allow installation of condensate trap to allow drainage of condensate from pan when installed on suction side of fan. 4. Provide for each hot or chilled water coil unit, water supply, return connection, strainer, gate valves, automatic temperature regulating valve, balancing cocks, as indicated. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces, vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets. B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 238216 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO TABLE OF CONTENTS 26 0000 - 1 D I V I S I O N 26: E L E C T R I C A L 26 0000 E L E C T R I C A L 26 0501 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0502 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIRMENTS 26 0519 LINE-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 2000 L O W (LINE) V O L T A G E D I S T R I B U T I O N 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 1 SECTION 26 0501 - COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. General electrical system requirements and procedures. 2. Perform excavating and backfilling work required by work of this Division as described in Contract Documents. 3. Make electrical connections to equipment provided under other Sections. 4. Furnish and install Penetration Firestop Systems at electrical system penetrations as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide following information for each item of equipment: a. Catalog Sheets. b. Assembly details or dimension drawings. c. Installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's name and catalog number. e. Name of local supplier. 2. Do not purchase equipment before approval of product data. 3. Submit in three-ring binder with hard cover (six sets) B. Quality Assurance / Control: 1. Report of site tests, before Substantial Completion. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified. 2. Material and equipment provided shall meet standards of NEMA or UL, or ULC, CSA, or EEMAC and bear their label wherever standards have been established and label service is available. B. Contractor shall obtain all permits and arrange all inspections required by local codes and ordinances applicable to this Division. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 2 1.4 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide competent instructor for time required to adequately train maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of electrical equipment and systems. Factory representatives shall assist this instruction as necessary. Schedule instruction period at time of final inspection. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare and submit (4) four complete copies of the O & M Manuals—manuals to contain informa- tion listed below. Place each manual in a tabbed three-ring binder upon completion of the project. 1. Operation and Maintenance manual must contain the following items: a. Copies of reviewed shop drawings. b. Letter of 1-year guarantee of workmanship. c. Copy of voltage and ammeter readings. d. Copy of letter verifying owner’s receipt of spare parts. 1.6 GUARANTEE A. The following guarantee is a part of this specification and shall be binding on the part of the Con-tractor: “The Contractor guarantees that this installation is free from mechanical defects. He agrees to re-place or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, any part of this installation which may fail or be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance.” 1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the course of construction, the Electrical Contractor shall maintain a set of drawings upon which all deviations from the original layout are recorded. These marked-up prints shall be turned over to the Architect/Engineer at the conclusion of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such work shall be included without additional cost to Owner. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 3 B. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Locations of electrical equipment shown on Drawings are approximate only. Field verify actual locations for proper installation. 2. Coordinate electrical equipment locations and conduit runs with those providing equipment to be served before installation or rough-in. a. Notify Architect of conflicts before beginning work. b. Coordinate locations of power and lighting outlets in mechanical rooms and other areas with mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, cabinets, etc, so they will be readily accessible and functional. 3. Work related to other trades which is required under this Division, such as cutting and patching, trenching, and backfilling, shall be performed according to standards specified in applicable Sections. B. Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at electrical system penetrations through walls, ceilings, and top plates of walls. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Notify Architect before test. Rectify defects at no additional cost to Owner. B. Measure current for each phase of each motor under actual final load operation, i.e. after air balance is completed for fan units, etc. Record this information along with full-load nameplates current rating and size of thermal overload unit installed for each motor. END OF SECTION 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS 26 0502 - 1 SECTION 26 0502 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Demolition involving electrical system as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26051 – Common Electrical Requirements 2. New and replacement work specified in appropriate specification Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such work shall be included without additional cost to Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Disconnect equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Carefully remove, disassemble, or dismantle as required, and store in approved location on site, existing items to be reused in completed work. B. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, extend, or repair raceways, conductors, outlets, and apparatus to allow continued use of electrical system. Use methods and materials as specified for new construction. C. Carefully remove all existing ceiling devices and light fixtures located on identified ceilings to be replaced. clean, store and reinstall on and/or in new ceilings and reconnect. EC shall recertify existing fire alarm system to the satisfaction of the local AHJ. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. Perform drilling, cutting, block-offs, and demolition work required for removal of necessary portions of electrical system. Do not cut joists, beams, girders, trusses, or columns without prior written permission from Architect. B. Remove concealed wiring abandoned due to demolition or new construction. Remove circuits, conduits, and conductors that are not to be re-used back to next active fixture, device, or junction box. C. Patch, repair, and finish surfaces affected by electrical demolition work, unless work is specifically called for under other Sections of the specifications. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove obsolete raceways, conductors, apparatus, and lighting fixtures promptly from site and dispose of legally. END OF SECTION 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 - 1 SECTION 26 0519 - LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE PART 1 - 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of conductors used on Project except as excluded below. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Line Voltage: Over 70 Volts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Line Voltage Conductors: 1. Copper with AWG sizes as shown: a. Minimum size shall be No. 12 except where specified otherwise. b. Conductor size No. 8 and larger. 2. Insulation: a. Standard Conductor Size No. 10 And Smaller: 600V type THWN or XHHW (75 deg C). b. Standard Conductor Size No. 8 And Larger: 600V Type THW, THWN, or XHHW (75 deg C). c. Higher temperature insulation as required by NEC or local codes. 3. Colors: a. 208Y / 120 V System: 1) Black: Phase A. 2) Red: Phase B. 3) Blue: Phase C. 4) Green: Ground. 5) White: Neutral. b. 480Y / 277 Volt System: 1) Brown: Phase A. 2) Orange: Phase B. 3) Yellow: Phase C. 4) Gray: Neutral. 5) Green: Ground. c. Conductors size No. 10 and smaller shall be colored full length. Tagging or other methods for coding of conductors size No. 10 and smaller not allowed. d. For feeder conductors larger than No. 10 at pull boxes, gutters, and panels, use painted or taped band or color tag color-coded as specified above. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 - 2 B. Standard Connectors: 1. Conductors No. 8 And Smaller: Steel spring wire connectors. 2. Conductors Larger Than No. 8: Pressure type terminal lugs. 3. Connections Outside Building: Watertight steel spring wire connections with waterproof, non- hardening sealant. C. Terminal blocks for tapping conductors: 1. Terminals shall be suitable for use with 75 deg C copper conductors. 2. Acceptable Products: a. 16323 by Cooper Bussmann, St Louis, MO www.bussmann.com b. LBA363106 by Square D Co, Palatine, IL www.squared.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6000. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Conductors and cables shall be continuous from outlet to outlet. 2. Do not use direct burial cable. B. Line Voltage Conductors (Over 70 Volts): 1. Install conductors in raceway except where specifically indicated otherwise. Run conductors of different voltage systems in separate conduits. 2. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting shall be as shown in Panel Schedules. Group circuit homeruns to panels as shown on Drawings. 3. Neutrals: a. On three-phase, 4-wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than three circuits. b. On single-phase, 3-wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than two circuits. c. Run separate neutrals for each circuit where specifically noted on Drawings. d. Where common neutral is run for two or three home run circuits, connect phase conductors to breakers in panel which are attached to separate phase legs so neutral conductors will carry only unbalanced current. Neutral conductors shall be of same size as phase conductors unless specifically noted otherwise. 4. Pulling Conductors: a. Do not pull conductors into conduit until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet boxes are free of foreign matter and moisture. b. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling conductors. c. Use only listed wire pulling lubricants. END OF SECTION 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1 SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install grounding for electrical installation as described in Contract Documents except as excluded below. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 03 3111. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Size materials as shown on Drawings and in accordance with applicable codes. B. Grounding And Bonding Jumper Conductors: Bare copper or with green insulation. C. Make grounding conductor connections to ground rods and water pipes using approved bolted clamps listed for such use. D. Service Grounding Connections And Cable Splices: 1. Make by compression type connectors designed specifically for this purpose. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Burndy b. Thomas & Betts. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate with Section 03 3111 in installing grounding conductor and placing concrete. Do not allow placement of concrete before Architect's inspection of grounding conductor installation. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 2 B. Grounding conductors and bonding jumper conductors shall be continuous from terminal to terminal without splice. Provide grounding for following. 1. Electrical service, its equipment and enclosures. 2. Conduits and other conductor enclosures. 3. Neutral or identified conductor of interior wiring system. 4. Main panelboard, power and lighting panelboards. 5. Non-current-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment such as motors, starter and controller cabinets, instrument cases, and lighting fixtures. C. Grounding connection to main water supply shall be accessible for inspection and made within 6 inches of point of entrance of water line to building. Provide bonding jumpers across water meter and valves to assure electrical continuity. D. Provide concrete-encased electrode system by embedding 20 feet minimum of No. 2/0 bare copper conductor in concrete footing, 2 inches minimum below concrete surface. Extend No. 2/0 copper conductor to main panel as shown on Drawings. E. Ground identified common conductor of electrical system at secondary side of main transformer supplying building. Ground identified grounded (neutral) conductor of electrical system on supply side of main service disconnect. F. Pull grounding conductors in non-metallic raceways, in flexible steel conduit exceeding 72 inches in length, and in flexible conduit connecting to mechanical equipment. G. Provide grounding bushings on all feeder conduit entrances into panelboards and equipment enclosures. H. Bond conduit grounding bushings to enclosures with minimum #10 AWG conductor. I. Connect equipment grounds to building system ground. 1. Use same size equipment grounding conductors as phase conductors up through #10 AWG. 2. Use NEC Table 250-95 for others unless noted otherwise in Drawings. J. Run separate insulated grounding cable from each equipment cabinet to electrical panel. Do not use intermediate connections or splices. Affix directly to cabinet. K. On motors, connect ground conductors to conduit with approved grounding bushing and to metal frame with bolted solderless lug. L. Do not bond neutral conductor of emergency generator set to set frame at generator location. M. Ground cabinet of transformers to conduit and ground wires, if installed. Bond transformer secondary neutral conductor to cabinet. N. Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest ground per NEC and local inspector. O. Provide and install a #6 ground conductor from main service ground to telephone board. Terminate ground at board on a grounding bar. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 3 P. Provide a separate, insulated equipment green grounding conductor in all feeder and branch circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing and to all metallic enclosures. A conduit ground is not acceptable. Install grounding bushings on both ends of all feeder conduit and bond to ground system. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Notify Architect for inspection two days minimum before placing concrete over grounding conductor. END OF SECTION 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 1 SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of material and installation procedures for raceway, boxes, and fittings used on Project but furnished under other Divisions. 2. Furnish and install raceway, conduit, and boxes used on Project not specified to be installed under other Divisions. 3. Furnish and install air / vapor barrier back boxes as described in Contract Documents. 4. Furnish and install main telephone service raceway as described in Contract Documents and to comply with telephone company requirements. 5. Furnish and install main electrical service raceway to comply with electrical utility company requirements. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 0501: General Electrical Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Raceway And Conduit: 1. Sizes: a. 3/4 inch for exterior underground use. b. 1/2 inch minimum elsewhere, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Types: Usage of each type is restricted as specified below by product. a. Galvanized rigid steel or galvanized intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is allowed for use in all areas. Where in contact with earth or concrete, wrap buried galvanized rigid steel and galvanized IMC conduit and fittings completely with vinyl tape. b. Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1) Allowed for use only in indoor dry locations where it is: a) Not subject to damage. b) Not in contact with earth. c) Not in concrete. 2) Flexible steel conduit or metal-clad cable required for final connections to indoor mechanical equipment. c. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit: 1) Allowed for use only underground or below concrete with galvanized rigid steel or IMC elbows and risers. d. Listed, Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 2 1) Use in outdoor final connections to mechanical equipment, length not to exceed 36 inches. e. Pre-wired 3/8 Inch Flexible Fixture Whips: Allowed only for connection to recessed lighting fixtures, lengths not to exceed 72 inches. 3. Prohibited Raceway Materials: a. Aluminum conduit. b. Armored cable type AC (BX) cable. B. Raceway And Conduit Fittings: 1. Rigid Steel Conduit And IMC: Threaded and designed for conduit use. 2. EMT: a. Compression type. b. Steel set screw housing type. 3. PVC Conduit: a. PVC type. Use PVC adapters at all boxes. b. PVC components, (conduit, fittings, cement) shall be from same Manufacturer. 4. Flexible Steel Conduit: Screw-in type. 5. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Sealtite type. 6. Expansion fittings shall be equal to OZ Type AX sized to raceway and including bonding jumper. 7. Prohibited Fitting Materials: a. Crimp-on, tap-on, indenter type fittings. b. Cast set-screw fittings for EMT. c. Spray (aerosol) PVC cement. C. Outlet Boxes: 1. Galvanized steel of proper size and shape are acceptable for all systems. Where metal boxes are used, provide following: a. Provide metal supports and other accessories for installation of each box. b. Equip ceiling and bracket fixture boxes with fixture studs where required. c. Equip outlets in plastered, paneled, and furred finishes with plaster rings and extensions to bring box flush with finish surface. 2. Telephone / data outlet boxes shall be 4 11/16” square deep box with single gang mud ring. D. Air / Vapor Barrier Back Boxes: Pre-molded polyethylene fitting between framing members and inhibiting air / vapor infiltration and exfiltration around recessed outlet boxes. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Cooper B-Line, Highland, IL www.bline.com. 2. Hubbell Incorporated, Milford, CT www.hubbell-wiring.com. 3. Square D, Palatine, IL www.squared.com. 4. Steel City, Div Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com. 5. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com. 6. Walker Systems Inc, Williamstown, www.wiremold.com. 7. Wiremold Co, West Hartford, CT www.wiremold.com. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of materials to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with Divisions 22 and 23 for installation of raceway for control of plumbing and HVAC equipment. 2. Before rough-in, verify locations of boxes with work of other trades to insure that they are properly located for purpose intended. a. Coordinate location of outlet for water cooler with Division 22. b. Coordinate location of outlets adjacent to or in millwork with Division 06 before rough-in. Refer conflicts to Architect and locate outlet under his direction. 3. Coordinate installation of floor boxes in carpeted areas with carpet installer to obtain carpet for box doors. 4. Install pull wires in raceways installed under this Section where conductors or cables are to be installed under other Divisions. B. Conduit And Raceway: 1. Conceal raceways within ceilings, walls, and floors, except at Contractor's option, conduit may be exposed on walls or ceilings of mechanical equipment areas and above acoustical panel suspension ceiling systems. Install exposed raceway runs parallel to or at right angles to building structure lines. 2. Keep raceway runs 6 inches minimum from hot water pipes. 3. Make no more than four quarter bends, 360 degrees total, in any conduit run between outlet and outlet, fitting and fitting, or outlet and fitting. a. Make bends and offsets so conduit is not injured and internal diameter of conduit is not effectively reduced. b. Radius of curve shall be at least minimum indicated by NEC. 4. Cut conduit smooth and square with run and ream to remove rough edges. Cap raceway ends during construction. Clean or replace raceway in which water or foreign matter have accumulated. 5. Install insulated bushings on each end of raceway 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger, and on all raceways where low voltage cables emerge. Install expansion fittings where raceways cross building expansion joints. 6. Run two spare conduits from each new panelboard to ceiling access area or other acceptable accessible area and cap for future use. 7. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise. All roof penetrations shall be flashed, counter flashed and sealed per Roofing Contractor. Coordinate all roof penetrations with the Roofing Contractor. 8. Provide nylon pull string with printed footage indicators secured at each end of each empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of each empty conduit, and indicate same on all empty or spare conduits on the as-built drawings. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 4 9. Install expansion-deflection joints where conduit crosses building expansion, seismic, or structural isolation break (SIB) joints. 10. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, seal opening around conduit with UL-listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. Fill void around perimeter of conduits with nonmetallic nonshrink grount in all concrete or masonry walls. 11. Bend PVC conduit by hot box bender and, for PVC 2 inches in diameter and larger, expanding plugs. Apply PVC adhesive only by brush. 12. Installation In Framing: a. Do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches of bearing points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of member width. b. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum. 13. Underground Raceway And Conduit: a. Bury underground raceway installed outside building 24 inches deep minimum. b. Bury underground conduit in planting areas 18 inches deep minimum. It is permissible to install conduit directly below concrete sidewalks, however, conduit must be buried 18 inches deep at point of exit from planting areas. 14. Conduit And Raceway Support: a. Securely support raceway with approved straps, clamps, or hangers, spaced as required. b. Do not support from mechanical ducts or duct supports without Architect's written approval. Securely mount raceway supports, boxes, and cabinets in an approved manner by: 1) Expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry. 2) Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units. 3) Wood screws on wood. 4) Metal screws on metal. 15. Prohibited Procedures: a. Use of wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry units for mounting raceway, supports, boxes, cabinets, or other equipment. b. Installation of raceway that has been crushed or deformed. c. Use of torches for bending PVC. d. Spray applied PVC cement. e. Boring holes in truss members. f. Notching of structural members. g. Supporting raceway from ceiling system support wires. h. Nail drive straps or tie wire for supporting raceway. C. Boxes: 1. Boxes shall be accessible and installed with approved cover. 2. Do not locate device boxes that are on opposite sides of framed walls in the same stud space. In other wall construction, do not install boxes back to back. 3. Locate boxes so pipes, ducts, or other items do not obstruct outlets. 4. Install outlets flush with finished surface and level and plumb. 5. Support switch boxes larger than two-gang with side brackets and steel bar hangers in framed walls. 6. At time of substantial completion, install blank plates on uncovered outlet boxes that are for future use. 7. Install air / vapor barrier back boxes behind outlet boxes that penetrate vapor barrier. 8. Location: 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 5 a. Install boxes at door locations on latch side of door, unless explicitly shown otherwise on Drawings. Verify door swings shown on electrical drawings with architectural drawings, and report discrepancies to Architect before rough-in. Distance of switch boxes from jamb shall be within 6 inches of door jamb. b. Arrange boxes for ceiling light fixtures symmetrically with respect to room dimensions and structural features. c. Properly center boxes located in walls with respect to doors, panels, furring, trim and consistent with architectural details. Where two or more outlets occur, space them uniformly and in straight lines with each other, if possible. d. Center ceramic tile boxes in tile. END OF SECTION 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ELECTICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 1 SECTION 26 0553-ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for electrical identification. 1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements B. In the event of conflict regarding electrical identification requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters on a black background. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Split sleeve or tubing type. Cloth or wraparound adhesive types not approved. C. Conductor-color Tape: Colored vinyl electrical tape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts. Secure nameplate to outside face of panelboard doors. D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application. 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO ELECTICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 2 E. Electrical Contractor shall write the circuit number to which each device is connected on the inside of the box (clearly visible when device is removed) and on the backside of each coverplate. Use a permanent black marker. 3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Conductors for power circuits to be identified per the following schedule. System Voltage Conductor 480Y/277V 208Y/120V Phase A Brown Black Phase B Orange Red Phase C Yellow Blue Neutral White with White orange stripe Grounding Green Green Isolated Ground Green with Green with yellow stripe yellow stripe Switchleg (lighting) Purple Pink 3.03 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below. B. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 3/16 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify voltage rating and source. C. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8 inch; identify source to device and the load it serves, including location. D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch; identify load served and source. E. Transformers: 3/16 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location. END OF SECTION 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 2816 - 1 SECTION 26 2816-DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Disconnect switches. B. Enclosures. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for disconnect switches. 1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements. 2. Section 26 0526 - Grounding. B. In the event of conflict regarding individually enclosed low-voltage protective device requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subjects to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of switch); 1. Square D Company 2.02 FABRICATED SWITCHES A. General: Provide heavy duty type disconnect and safety switches as indicated herein. Provide: 1. Heavy duty switches on 240 and/0r 600 volt rated circuits. 2. HP rated switches on all motor circuits. 2.03 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES A. Provide heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed switches, fusible or non-fusible as indicated of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 240 and/or 600 volts, 60 hertz; incorporating spring assisted, quick-make, quick-break switches which are so constructed that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Provide single phase or three phase with solid neutral as required by applications. Equip with an interlocked operating handle which is capable of being padlocked in OFF position. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R as required by application, unless noted. Provide fusible switches with Class R rejection fuse clip kits. 2.04 FUSES 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 2816 - 2 A. Provide fuses for switches, as required of classes, types and ratings needed to fulfill electrical requirements for services indicated. Provide spare fuses amounting to one spare fuse for each 10 installed but not less than three of any one type and size. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings. B. Install disconnects plumb. C. Maximum Height: Top of enclosure at 78 inches AFF (Above Finished Floor). D. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check for proper installation and tightness of connections for disconnects. END OF SECTION 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTOR STARTERS 26 2913 - 1 SECTION 26 2913-MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Extent of motor starter work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of motor starter in this section include the following: 1. AC Fraction horsepower Manual Starters 2. AC Line Voltage Manual Starters 3. AC Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters 4. AC Combination Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters 1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for motor controls. 1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements. B. In the event of conflict regarding motor starters requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type and rating of motor starter): 1. Allen-Bradley Company 2. General Electric Company 3. Square D Company 2.02 MAINTENANCE STOCK, FUSES A. For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not more than 5 units of each type, for both power and control circuit fuses. 2.03 MOTOR STARTERS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and ancillary components; of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated which comply with manufacturer’s standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published information, and as required for complete installations. B. Thermal Overload Units: Provide thermal overload units, sized in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for full load current of motor controlled. Provide thermal heater units, sized to actual running full load current if actual full load current is less than 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTOR STARTERS 26 2913 - 2 90 percent of motor nameplate full load current. Size heater for mechanical equipment after air and water balancing have been completed. Spare parts: Provide a spare set of each type and/or size. C. AC Fractional HP Manual Starters (Equal to Square D Class 2510): Provide manual, single-phase, 1 and 2 pole, 300 volt AC max, fractional HP motor starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; equip with one piece thermal overload relay with field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10 percent of nominal overload heater rating; for protection of AC motors of 1 HP and less. (For manually controlled motors in excess of 1 HP, see Line Voltage Manual Starters specified herein.) Provide starter with quick-make, quick-break trip free toggle mechanisms, green pilot lights, and with lock-off toggle operated handle. Mount surface units in NEMA 1 enclosures, unless noted otherwise. Provide flush mounted units with coverplate to match wiring device coverplates. D. AC Line Voltage Manual Starters (Equal to Square D Class 2510): Provide line voltage manual starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt AC max; equip with pushbutton operator, low voltage protection feature, and green pilot light. Provide starters with trip free mechanism such that contacts will open under load and remain open until thermal element has cooled, and unit is reset. Mount surface units in NEMA 1 enclosure, unless noted otherwise. Provide overlapping trim for flush mounted units. E. AC Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters (Equal to Square D Class 8536): Provide line voltage magnetic starters (nothing smaller than size 1 - typical all arrangements), to types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt max, 120 bolt control voltage with thermal overload protection and under voltage trip in all phases. Equip units with holding contact, 2 normally open, and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts, unless noted otherwise. Provide fused control transformer in each starter. Mount hand-off-auto switch, red pilot light and reset button in face of enclosure. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure unless noted otherwise. Equip all spare starters complete with items as specified herein. F. AC Combination Non-Reversing Breaker and Magnetic Starters (Equal to Square D Class 8538): Provide line voltage combination starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics as indicated for 8536; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volts max with non-reversing magnetic starters as specified herein; in common cubicle or enclosure with motor circuit protector. 1. Provide instantaneous trip circuit breaker as indicated and adjust to comply with manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide combination starters for individual mounting, or for group mounting in motor control center as indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated. G. AC Combination Non-Reversing Fused Disconnect and Magnetic Starters (Equal to Square D Class 8539): Provide line voltage combination starters, of types, ratings, and electrical characteristics; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt maximum with non-reversing magnetic starters as specified herein; in common cubicle or enclosure with fusible disconnect switch. Provide quick-make, quick-break, visible blade disconnect switch. Provide 2, 3, and 4; and visible 2020 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEM REPLACEMENT CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ROMNEY BUILDING BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO MOTOR STARTERS 26 2913 - 3 blade, automatic circuit interrupters with push-to-trip feature and separate fuse clips for larger NEMA sizes. Fuse all starters with dual-element (time-delay) fuses equal to Bussman FRN/FRS. Provide combination starters for individualmounting, or for group mounting in motor control centers as indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA’s “Standards of Installation”, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Install fuses in fusible disconnects, if any. C. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. D. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. E. Each motor starter shall be equipped with lock out capabilities. F. Subsequent to wire/care hook-up energize motor starters and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements. END OF SECTION